Home

2005 Chevrolet Avalanche Owners Manual

1. 5 1 21 Safety Belts Are for Everyone 1 9 Safety Warnings and Symbols eceeeeeeeeeeees iii Scheduled Maintenance n a eneee 6 4 Seats Head Restraints rssi api ns 1 7 Heated Seats inining ania edan 1 4 Manual Passenger ceceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeee eens 1 2 MGMONY dedii errante pa e AA 2 85 Power Lumbar iissescniiieni niesieni iiias 1 3 Power Seat csssessccivsvsactetendoei avectsasauy eeacacnees 1 2 Rear Seat Operation c cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 7 Reclining Seatbacks ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 1 5 Secondary Latch System ceceeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 5 89 Securing a Child Restraint Center Front Seat Position ceeeeeeeeee ee 1 45 Designed for the LATCH System 005 1 43 Rear Seat Position ccceceeeeeeeeeee eee eee ees 1 43 Right Front Seat Position cceeeeeeeeee ees 1 46 Security Light ccceeeceeeeeenee eee ee een n aese 3 43 SEIVICE E E bad egal ees 5 3 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle sornes ada oe aides 5 4 Doing Your Own Work imresisirerss benseerien 5 4 Engine Soon Light cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 39 Publications Ordering Information 7 11 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 62 Setting the TMC svisccateneat cieceetaweneeesamenceecan cares 3 64 Sheet Metal Damage cceeeeeeeeeneeeeeaees 5 102 Shifting Into Park P cc
2. ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee ene 3 9 Winter Driving siorino aan a 4 40 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 104 Your Vehicle and the Environment 0 0 6 2
3. sceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 19 Before Leaving on a Long Trip eee 4 36 Brake Anti Lock Brake System ABS o c 4 6 Emergencies rererere attest EN 4 8 Paty etie a es 2 40 System Warning Light c eeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 3 35 Brake Pedal Throttle cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 30 Brake Serra cccecantaneictinntane ne e A 5 41 Braking enmana a a 4 5 Braking in Emergencies cceeeeeeeeeeeee een ee ees 4 8 Break In New Vehicle cccccceceeeeeeeeeeees 2 28 Bulb Replacement eceeeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 52 Daytime Running Lamps eeeeeeeeee eee ee 5 58 Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Daytime Running Lamps 0 eeeeeeeee ee 5 56 Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parking LAMPS sienien innn onanan 5 55 Halogen BUDS vi ccceccese vee teeevieccsiveeen asin 5 52 eadlamps ii stussackeocses lake Site anA 5 53 Replacement Bulbs c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 5 60 TAMAM pS eeart niapi vat eoubiedbe ncaa 5 59 Buying New Tires ccceeeeeeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 72 California F elereninsncssi areant aE 5 6 Canadian OWNne S ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee eee eeneenees ii Capacities and Specifications eeeeee 5 114 Carbon Monoxide 2 13 2 22 2 44 4 40 4 62 Care of Safety Belts ismerne etd 5 99 Your CD and DVD Player eeeeeeeneee ees 3 104 Your CDs and DVDS cc ceeeeeeeeeeeene
4. A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly 1 21 Right Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger s safety belt properly see Driver Position on page 1 14 The right front passenger s safety belt works the same way as the driver s safety belt except for one thing If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way you will engage the child restraint locking feature which may turn off the passenger s frontal airbag If this happens unintentionally just let the belt go back all the way and start again Center Front Passenger Position If your vehicle has a front bench seat someone can sit in the center position 1 22 Lap Belt When you sit in a center front seating position you have a lap safety belt which has no retractor To make the belt longer tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt To make the belt shorter pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug Buckle position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap shoulder belt If the belt is not long enough see
5. BAND Alternate Frequency Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type To turn alternate frequency on press and hold BAND for two seconds AF ON will appear on the display The radio may switch to stations with a stronger frequency To turn alternate frequency off press and hold BAND again for two seconds AF OFF will appear on the display The radio will not switch to other stations This function does not apply for XM Satellite Radio Service 3 80 Setting Preset PTYs RDS Only These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets Up to 12 PTYs six FM1 and six FM2 can be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons by performing the following steps 1 Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2 2 Press the TYPE button to activate program type select mode P TYPE and the last selected PTY will appear on the display 3 Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the TYPE button to select a PTY 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever that numbered pushbutton is pressed the PTY that was set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton RDS Messages INFO Information If the current station has a message INFO will appear on the display Press this button to see the message The message may display the artist song title call in phone numbers etc If the entire message is not displayed parts of the message will appear
6. If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same day repair 7 7 Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait Chevrolet helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes a one way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles 16 km from the dealership Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs reimbursement of up to a five day maximum may be available for the use of public transportation such as a taxi or bus In addition should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses of up to a five day maximum may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts Courtesy Rental Vehicle Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of 30 00 a day an
7. Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kiloPascal kPa Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats and air conditioning Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire s height to its width Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Cold Inflation Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire measured in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa before a tire has built up heat from driving See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 67 Curb Weight This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant but without passengers and cargo DOT Markings A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation DOT motor vehicle safety stan
8. 1 Squeeze and pull down the latch levers A located near the upper corners of the rear glass to unlatch 2 Hold the rear glass in place with one hand and turn the glass lock knobs located at both top corners of the glass storage pocket to the unlocked position 3 Pull the rear glass out from the storage pocket using the grab handles With the rear glass tilted at an angle place the bottom edge in the lower channel of the window frame Be sure to align the rear glass side to side using the alignment arrows G 5 Apply a firm downward pressure and then push the rear glass flat against the window frame Use the grab handles at the top of the rear glass to assist you 6 Push the rear glass flat against the window frame and push each latch lever up until it locks You should hear a click when each latch lever locks correctly Lowering the Midgate with the Rear Glass in Place The midgate can be lowered to allow the cargo area of your vehicle to extend into the cab The rear glass can be either installed in its normal position or it can be removed and stored in the rear glass storage pocket To lower the midgate do the following 1 Fold the rear seats The front seats might have to be moved forward slightly to allow the rear seats to fold See Rear Seat Operation on page 1 7 for more information 2 20 Rear Glass in Normal Position Standing outside of the vehicle hold the midgate securely
9. 1 47 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 1 48 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor If you are using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt You should not be able to pull more of the belt from the retractor once the lock has been set 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure 8 If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system and the air bag is off the off indicator will be lit and stay lit in the inside rearview mirror when the key is turned to RUN or START If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit turn the vehicle off Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicator is still lit check to make sure that the vehicle s seatback is not pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion If this happens slightly recline the vehicle s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint If this happens adjust the head restraint If the on indicator is still
10. To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL do the following 1 NO a PON Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll Set the parking brake Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle Put the transmission in NEUTRAL N Shift the transfer case to 2HI Simultaneously press and hold the 2HI and 4LO buttons for 10 seconds The NEUTRAL light will come on when the transfer case shift to NEUTRAL is complete Shift the transmission to REVERSE R for one second then shift the transmission to DRIVE D for one second Turn the ignition to LOCK 10 11 Place the transmission shift lever in PARK P Release the parking brake prior to towing Shifting Out of NEUTRAL To shift out of NEUTRAL do the following 1 Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL N and turn the ignition to RUN with the engine off Press the button for the desired transfer case shift position 2HI 4H AUTO 4WD OR 4LO After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL the NEUTRAL light will go out Release the parking brake 6 Start the engine and shift the transmission to the desired position Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of the different modes may cause the transfer case to enter the shift protection mode This will protect the transfer case from possible damage and will only allow the transfer case
11. Turn the ignition to LOCK If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for six weeks or more remove the battery cable from the negative terminal post of the battery to prevent your battery from draining while towing Four Wheel Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle from the rear 1 af won Drive the vehicle onto the dolly Put the transmission in PARK P Turn the engine off but leave the ignition on Firmly set the parking brake Follow the dolly manufacturer s instructions to attach and secure the vehicle being towed to the dolly and then the loaded dolly to the tow vehicle Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow dolly 4 60 Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P You or someone else could be seriously injured Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in NEUTRAL See Parking Brake on page 2 40 6 Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL N See Four Wheel Drive on page 2 35 for the proper procedure to select the neutral position for your vehicle Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the tow vehicle Turn the ignition off and lock the steering column If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for six weeks or more remove the battery cable from the negative terminal post of the battery to prevent your b
12. What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Instead recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil ask your dealer a service station or a local recycling center for help 5 21 Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for the location of the engine air cleaner filter and the air filter restriction indicator if equipped 5 22 When to Inspect If your vehicle is equipped with an air filter restriction indicator it lets you know when the engine air cleaner filter needs to be replaced On vehicles with a restriction indicator you should inspect the air filter restriction indicator at every oil change and replace the engine air cleaner filter when the indicator tells you to On vehicles without an air filt
13. always expect the unexpected Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do Be ready for their mistakes Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents Yet they are common Allow enough following distance It is the best defensive driving maneuver in both city and rural driving You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task Anything that distracts from the driving task such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call reading or reaching for something on the floor makes 4 2 proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision with resulting injury Ask a passenger to help do things like this or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy It is the number one contributor to the highway death toll claiming thousands of victims every year Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle e Judgment e Muscular Coordination e Vision e Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and
14. 4 32 Gity Driving s2s22scksscgesnessieadinesedgecseaeteacensaaedeness 4 34 Driving Your Vehicle Freeway Driving aiccecccnacties odie areeveanerirertectoensy 4 35 Before Leaving on a Long Trip accses 4 36 Highway Hypnosis ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 37 Hill and Mountain Roads ceeeeeeeee eee eeee 4 38 Winter Driving 22idivsseicadiisiiedaieeeiaioieeeas 4 40 If You Are Stuck In Sand Mud IGG OF SNOW wasincictscestvadaccieendeeranditeniamisced 4 44 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out 4 44 Recovery Hooks cecceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeceeeeeeees 4 45 Loading Your Vehicle cceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 46 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment 4 52 TOWING irren a ENSE een 4 56 Towing Your Vehicle asnescecsssercserenrerrrrenn 4 56 Recreational Vehicle Towing eeeeeeeeee 4 56 Level Control oidcteeresctes eacaitecli niin teed 4 61 Truck Camper Loading Information 4 61 Trailer Recommendations seeeeeeeeee es 4 61 TOWING a Wallet Seepia ne 4 62 Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is Drive defensively Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle Buckle up See Safety Belts They Are for Everyone on page 1 9 Defensive driving really means be ready for anything On city streets rural roads or freeways it means
15. Children and Small Adults eeeeeeeeee 1 26 Safety Belt Extender c eeeceeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 1 28 Child Restraints ccccceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee ees 1 29 Older Children ccceceececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 1 29 Infants and Young Children c eeeeeee ees 1 32 Child Restraint Systems cceeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 1 35 Where to Put the Restraint eee 1 38 Seats and Restraint Systems TOD Sta rangei Top Strap Anchor Location 0006 Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children LATCH System 0 08 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System n se Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position ccccc cece cece ee ee seen es Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position cccceeee cece eee Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position c cccccee cece eee Airbag System Where Are the Airbags ceeeeeeeee eres When Should an Airbag Inflate What Makes an Airbag Inflate 0 How Does an Airbag Restrain 0 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates Passenger Sensing System 0eeeeees Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped LEIO E S E nannies Restraint System Check Checking Your Restraint Systems Repla
16. Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your GM dealer Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your GM dealer s body and paint shop 5 102 Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your GM dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ring shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this GM will repair at no charge to
17. FM1 FM2 AM or XM1 or XM2 if equipped or a CD If a CD is loaded the CD symbol will appear on the display A SEEK V Press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or to the previous radio station and stay there The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band When a CD is playing press the up or the down arrow to fast forward or reverse A voL Y Volume Press the up or the down arrow to increase or to decrease the volume Radio Reception AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other Static can occur on AM stations caused by things like storms and power lines Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise FM Stereo FM stereo will give the best sound but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals causing the sound to fade in and out XM Satellite Radio Service XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast to coast Just as with FM tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals causing the sound to fade in and out The radio may display NO SIGNAL to indicate interference 3 103 Care of Your CDs and DVDs Handle discs carefully Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust If the surfa
18. Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions Interior Plastic Components Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish Glass Surfaces Glass should be cleaned often GM Glass Cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass See Vehicle Care Appearance Materials on page 5 103 Notice If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle you could scratch the glass and or cause damage to the rear window defogger and the integrated radio antenna When cleaning the glass on your vehicle use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry Do not bleach or dye safety belts If you do it may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Washing Your Vehicle
19. do the following 1 Open one of the rear doors 2 Move the lever forward to engage the rear door security lock 3 Close the door 4 Do the same thing to the other rear door The rear doors cannot be opened from the inside when this feature is in use If you want to open the rear door while the security lock is engaged unlock the door and open the door from the outside Move the lever rearward to disengage the child security lock feature Lockout Protection This feature protects you from locking your key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door is open If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open and the key is in the ignition all of the doors will lock and then the driver s door will unlock Midgate or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the midgate e Make sure all windows are shut Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed on the setting that brings in outside air This will force outside air into your vehicle See Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3 22 If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way See Engine Exhaust on page 2 44 It can be dangerous to drive with the cargo area covered and the tailgate and the midgate open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You can not see or smell CO It can cause unconscious
20. s Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 35 00 Without Portfolio Owner s Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 25 00 7 12 Current and Past Model Order Forms Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form please specify year and model name of the vehicle ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at www helminc com Or you can write to Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation Allow ample time for delivery Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U S funds Accessory Power Outlets eceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 19 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Velilerine aae els 1 62 Additives Fuel sss disscddvntapeaeapenhedisncrsiectacesasondens 5 6 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal 2 30 Air Cleaner Filter Engine cceeeeeeeeeeeneeees 5 22 Air Conditioning cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 20 3 22 Airbag Passenger Status Indicator 0e0e 3 32 Readiness Light 2 eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 31 Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module SDM 7 9 Airbag Systemie ioeie iaaiiai aar is 1 49
21. see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 62 Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow etc the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not snow etc be sure to get it fixed Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories When the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses circuit breakers and fusible thermal links This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without like the radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can 5 105 Instrument Panel Fuse Block The fuse block access door is on the driver s side edge of the instrument p
22. the airbag to be enabled the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active 1 60 For some children who have outgrown child restraints and for very small adults the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag depending upon the person s seating posture and body build Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person If a person of adult size is sitting in the right front passenger s seat but the off indicator is lit it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat If this happens turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully upright position then sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with the person s legs comfortably extended Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes This will allow the system to detect that person and then enable the passenger s airbag CAUTION Continued vehicle serviced promptly because an adult size person sitting in the right front passenger s seat may not have the protection of the frontal airbag See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 31 for more on this including important safety information Aftermarket equipment such as seat covers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates You m
23. transfer case in the 2 Wheel High 4 High or 4 Low position 4 25 Driving Downhill When off roading takes you downhill you will want to consider a number of things e How steep is the downhill Will be able to maintain vehicle control e What is the surface like Smooth Rough Slippery Hard packed dirt Gravel e Are there hidden surface obstacles Ruts Logs Boulders e What is at the bottom of the hill Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks If you decide you can go down a hill safely then try to keep your vehicle headed straight down and use a low gear This way engine drag can help your brakes and they will not have to do all the work Descend slowly keeping your vehicle under control at all times Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade This could cause loss of control and a serious accident Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control 4 26 Q Are there some things should not do when driving down a hill A Yes These are important because if you ignore them you could lose control and have a serious accident e When driving downhill avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill A hill that is not too steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across You could roll over if you do not drive straight down e Never go downhill with the transmission in NEUT
24. vehicle The child restraint instructions will show you how 4 If the child restraint is forward facing attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage The child restraint instructions will show you how Also see Top Strap on page 1 39 5 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint simply unhook the top tether from the top tether anchorage and then disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH anchorages Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH system see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children LATCH System on page 1 41 See Top Strap on page 1 39 if the child restraint has one If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system you will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Put the child restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 1 43 3 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the the retractor to set the
25. 2 44 Mid Gate fave ca dtd chs si cncceameadeanatieneveaut e 2 13 Running Your Engine While You Are Parked 2 44 WWAllQate iaeio E E AEN 2 22 MINT ONS iciczs ooteeses eaten eee 2 45 WINDOWS 2220005 cc cence ncsactoseteandananenacctensnesmcnes 2 24 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Power WindOwS 0cccceccuecseeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeues 2 25 OnStar Compass and Temperature SUN VISOPS cccacecanccedceancndacedsaadaeieedad Ea 2 25 Pe Dimming Rearview Mior With Seeley Sina 2 45 Theft Deterrent Systems wee 2 26 Compass and Temperature Display ee See 2 48 Content Theft Deterrent E 2 26 Outside Camper Type Mirrors us 2 51 PASSIOCK rosne eaa a 2 27 Outside Power TOS a 2 54 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 28 Outside Convex Mirror cccccceeceeeeee seen ees 2 52 New Vehicle Break In cccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 2 28 Outside Heated Mirrors 0 eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 53 Ignition Positions scissioni 2 28 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb Retained Accessory Power RAP 455 2 29 VIEW ASSISE iesnas toichanctonndespaateidanceniinscadacn 2 53 Starting Your Engine 1s 2 29 OnStar System ernn 2 54 2 1 Section 2 Features and Controls HomeLink Transmitter cccccceceee 2 56 Rear Storage Area cceeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeee eee ees 2 61 Programming the HomeLink Transmitter 2 57 Cargo Cover Panels cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
26. 45 DIC Operation and Displays 0 eeeeeeee 3 46 DIC Vehicle Customization ceeeeeeeeee 3 58 DIC Warnings and Messages 0 eeeeeeee 3 49 Driving At NIG cierne ad ean 4 30 Oin A E asd T 4 34 DGlCNSIVG sotip a a 4 2 DIUKOM seirinin ees ceecghes nnsa aa E lass 4 2 FCQWAY sideri mocap ia aN ia 4 35 Hill and Mountain Roads 4 38 In Rain and on Wet Roads eee eee 4 32 Recovery Hooks eccseeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeneeees 4 45 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 4 44 WHTGE cc serans ae x danteangndeaenneeiae 4 40 Dual Automatic Climate Control System 3 22 Dual Climate Control System eeeeeeeeeee 3 20 DVD Rear Seat Entertainment System 5 3 89 Electrical System vxcecc2es eee ned ieee cdiviees wares kes 5 105 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block 5 108 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 0eeeee ee 5 105 Instrument Panel Fuse Block 006 5 106 Power Windows and Other Power Options 5 105 Underhood Fuse Block eeeeeeeeee eee 5 109 Windshield Wiper Fuses scere 5 105 Engine Air Cleaner Filter ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee es 5 22 Battery sariaren eaan a AREAN 5 44 Check and Service Engine Soon Light 3 39 COON ANE senere a E cadeee ceanGenhs 5 28 Coolant Heater ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 31 Coolant Temperature Gage eeeeeeee
27. 63 Press the button at the end of the shift lever to enable disable the tow haul mode A light on the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate that tow haul mode has been selected The vehicle will automatically turn off tow haul every time it is started 4 64 Driving with tow haul activated without a heavy load or with no trailer will cause reduced fuel economy and unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics but will not cause damage Operating the vehicle in tow haul when lightly loaded or with no trailer at all will not cause damage However there is no benefit to the selection of tow haul when the vehicle is unloaded Such a selection when unloaded may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy Tow haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It depends on how you plan to use your rig For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important And it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle Use one of the following charts to determine how much your vehicle can weigh based upon your vehicle model and options Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the Notice Using a fifth wheel or goose neck hitch driver and one passenger are in the tow
28. 800 222 1020 1 800 833 2438 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 CHEV USA 243 8872 Fax Number 313 381 0022 From Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish Fax Number 313 381 0022 From U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 Fax Number 313 381 0022 Canada Customer Assistance General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 Overseas Customer Assistance Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands Customer Assistance General Motors de Mexico S de R L de C V Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma 2740 Col Lomas de Bezares C P 11910 Mexico D F 01 800 508 0000 Long Distance 011 52 53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 toward eligible aftermarket driver s or passenger s adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle such as hand controls and wheelchair scooter lifts The offer is available for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease For more details or to determine your vehicle s eligibility visi
29. AUTO mode If the outside temperature is 40 F 4 C or warmer your air conditioning compressor will automatically run to help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield Rear Window Defogger If your vehicle has this feature the lines you see on the rear window warm the glass The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window G J Rear Press this button to turn the rear window defogger on or off An indicator light in the button will come on to let you know that the rear window defogger is activated The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes after the button is pressed If you need additional warming time press the button again If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors this button will activate them Notice Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window may damage the rear window defogger Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not clear the inside of the rear window with sharp objects Outlet Adjustment Your vehicle has air outlets located in the center and on the side of your instrument panel that allow you to adjust the direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle Move the louvers up or down Use the thumbwheel next to or underneath the outlet to close the louvers For the most efficient airflow and temperature control keep the outlet in the fully opened position 3 27 Operation Tips e Keep the hood and front air inlets
30. Assistance Center at 1 800 222 1020 or write Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33170 Detroit MI 48232 5170 In Canada please call us at 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French Or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Service Publications Ordering Information Service Manuals Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc Transmission Transaxle Transfer Case Unit Repair Manual This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures adjustments and specifications for GM transmissions transaxles and transfer cases Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle In Canada information pertaining to Product Service Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General Motors dealer or by calling 1 800 GM DRIVE 1 800 463 7483 Owner s Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner s manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner
31. Canada 10953626 Weatherstrip Teflon Superlube GM Part Front Axle Squeaks No U S 12371287 in Canada Propshaft 10953437 Spline or Spline Lubricant Special Lubricant One Piece GM Part No U S 12345879 in Propshaft Canada 10953511 or lubricant Spline meeting requirements of Two Wheel GM 9985830 Drive with Auto Trans Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer po Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Engine Air Cleaner Filter High Capacity 25313348 A1519C Standard 25313349 Oil Filter 5300 V8 88984215 PF46 8100 V8 25324052 Spark Plugs 5300 V8 12571164 41 985 8100 V8 12578277 41 983 Wiper Blades 22 inches 56 0 cm Talata O gt Y High capacity engine air cleaner filter 25313349 A1518C may be substituted Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading who performed the service and the type of services performed in the boxes provided See Maintenance Requirements on page 6 2 in this section Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6 9 can be added on the following record pages Also you should retain all maintenance receipts Maintenance Record Odometer Maintenance I or s Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed 6 16 Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Maintenance I or Readin
32. FOG EE T E T Reading oi pecccnstnaswedadsRevneneheaeneties aia LATCH System Child Restraints ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een eees Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System cc ecececeeeeeeeeee eee een een eees Level Control wacccccciscscncarcccde teenie deneeteecceneseeecs Light Airbag Readiness cceeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeen tees Anti Lock Brake System Warning 0 Brake System Warning cceceeeeeeeeeeeee ees Charging System cccceeeeeeee eee eeee niinen Cruise Control lt s2sictsclsiiiesd actacsaeteteee Mewar Highbeam On Low Fuel Warning Malfunction Indicator cceeeeeeeeeeee eee eee ee Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Safety Belt Reminder n Security Tow Haul Mode Traction Off Lighting Entry Exit Locking Rear AXxI6 5 2s cascicccsssndnentnpaectendccnweeadeenih Lockout Protection ccccccec eee caeeeeeeeeeetenes 2 12 Locks Delayed LOCKING serseri ou he ter deren 2 9 DOOD seser E E 2 8 Lockout Protection eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 2 12 Power DOOP terceiros enna aE 2 9 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 10 Rear Door Security LOCKS e eeeeeeeeeee ees 2 12 Lossio Comttol rasna aeaiia 4 17 Low Fuel Warning Light asaan 3 44 Luggage Carrien csser airone a 2 61 Lumbar Power Controls c0 cceccesceeneteeecamenne iaaea 1 3 Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Servic
33. HID Left Hand High Intensity Starter Relay Discharge Lamps Ride Control DRL Daytime Running Lamps TRL B U Backup Lamps Trailer Wiring RVC Regulated Voltage Control 7 Instrument Panel Fuel Purp ee IPC DIC Cluster Driver Information Fuel Pump Relay Canis HVAC ECAS Climate Control Controller y9 CIG LTR Cigarette Lighter Back up Lamps Automatic Transmission Shift Lock HI HDLP RT High Beam Headlamp Right Control System HDLP LOW Headlamp Low Beam Relay RR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger A C COMP Air Conditioning HDLP HI Headlamp High Beam Relay Compressor Relay PRIME Not Used A C COMP Air Conditioning Compressor Oxygen Sensors RR WPR Rear Wiper Washer Supplemental Inflatable RADIO Audio System AIRBAG Restraint System Mid Bussed Electrical Front Parking Lamps SEO B1 Center HomeLink Rear PRT TARK Sidemarker Lamps Heated Seats LO HDLP LT Headlamp Low Beam Left 5 112 Usae Auxiliary Electric Cooling Fan BTSI Brake Transmission Shift Fuse Block Interlock System CRNK Starting System The auxiliary electric LO HDLP RT Headlamp Low Beam Right a the block is FOGLP z Sra a og amps driver s side of the vehicle HORN Horn Relay am 4 next to the underhood W S WASH Windshield and Rear Window 2 CH fuse block Washer Pump Relay ICOOL FAN 3 COOL FAN 2 a a Windshield and Rear Window W S WASH Washer Pump OnStar Rear Seat INFO Entertainment RADIO AMP Radio Amplifier Right Hand High Intensity RHAID Discharge Lamp H
34. How to Use This Manual Many people read the owner manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle If this is done it can help you learn about the features and controls for the vehicle Pictures and words work together in the owner manual to explain things Index A good place to quickly locate information about the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found 2004 General Motors Corporation All Rights Reserved Safety Warnings and Symbols There are a number of safety cautions in this book We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people In the caution area we tell you what the hazard is Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard Please read these cautions If you do not you or others could be hurt You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book This safety symbol means Do Not Do Not do this or Do Not let this happen Vehicle Damage Warnings Also in this manual you will find these notices Notice These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle A notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by your vehicle s warranty and it
35. Is Time for New Tires ccce 5 71 TOMMGAU COVES isicie ici Gecttnt ese cdewtesbcck doadiwedietinneas 2 78 TODS SUA a aa a a E EA 1 39 Top Strap Anchor Location eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 40 Top Box Storage osiin nisinsin seriais 2 77 TowHa l ModE ssrenceonn aa 2 35 Tow Haul Mode Light ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 3 44 Towing Recreational Vehicle cceeeeeeeeeereeees 4 56 Towing a Trailer ecseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeerenees 4 62 VOUur Vehicle csi sic ciedeeadecadamneesyetateaceieeseeadt ote 4 56 Traction Assist System TAS c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 4 8 OM IGN rnain ieee n teeta es 3 36 Stabilitrak System ccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 10 Trailer Recommendations 2 csccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeerenees 4 61 Transmission Fluid AUtOMatic ccccec cece Ea 5 25 Temperature Gage ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 38 Transmission Operation Automatic 5 2 32 Truck Camper Loading Information 5 4 61 Turn and Lane Change Signals c eeeeeeees 3 8 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever ceeeeeeeeee ee 3 7 Understanding Radio Reception 8 3 103 Uniform Tire Quality Grading eeeeeeeee eee 5 73 Vehicle COMMON zc czc52 tte cvecense dteeacatecrnr sae aause oneraanias 4 5 Damage WarningS ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees iv SYMDOINS reene Aa e Ea aN EEA ieee iv Vehicle Cust
36. Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to change the lubricant See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 How to Check Lubricant 1 Remove the filler plug 2 Add new fluid until the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the transfer case To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 3 Reinstall the filler plug Use care not to overtighten the filler plug Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be ona level surface 5 51 If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the front axle you may need to add some lubricant e When the differential is cold add enough lubricant to raise the level from 1 2 inch 12 mm to about 5 8 inch 18 mm below the filler plug hole for the 1500 series and from 1 4 inch 6 mm to about 3 8 inch 10 mm below the filler plug hole for 2500 series e When the differential is at operating temperature warm add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the
37. Make sure your instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position See nstrument Panel Brightness on page 3 17 Fog Lamps If your vehicle has fog lamps you can use them for better vision in foggy or misty conditions Your parking lamps and or low beam headlamps must be on for your fog lamps to work 3 16 The fog lamp button is located on the left side of your instrument panel Press the button to turn the fog lamps on while the headlamps or parking lamps are on Press the button again to turn them off An indicator light will glow near the button when the fog lamps are on Remember fog lamps alone will not give off as much light as your headlamps Never use your fog lamps in the dark without turning on the headlamps The fog lamps will go off whenever your high beam headlamps come on When the high beams go off the fog lamps will come on again The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition is turned off If you still want to use the fog lamps after you restart the vehicle you will need to press the fog lamp button again Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp If your vehicle has this feature this button includes wiring provisions for a dealer or a qualified service center to install an auxiliary roof lamp This button is located on the center of the S instrument panel near the comfort controls When the button wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof mounted lamp pressing the button will
38. Overview 0 eeeee 3 4 Climate Controls eee eeee eee eee eee ees 3 20 Hazard Warning Flashers eeeeeeeeeeeee ee 3 6 Dual Climate Control System eeeeeeeee 3 20 Other Warning Devices ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 3 6 Dual Automatic Climate Control System 3 22 Honeen nae nace seng anes O 3 6 Outlet Adjustment c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 3 27 Tilt Wheel Suseeiies pes besssinsststensrrnnnnnttennrennnntte mt 3 7 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 28 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever sesee 3 7 Instrument Panel Cluster c0ccccccceeeeeeeees 3 29 Turn and Lane Change Signals 111s 3 8 Speedometer and Odometer cccccccceeeees 3 30 Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 3 8 TAChOMEter oo ccccceceeeseeseeccececcceeesesaeeeeeeeeeees 3 30 Flash to Pass EEE AE E E ER 3 9 Safety Belt Reminder Light 00 cc ccceceeeeee 3 30 Windshield WIPGIS mine eon er RR RAS 3 9 Airbag Readiness Light 0 ccccccscceseeesseeees 3 31 Windshield Washer csecsen en aaia 3 10 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 00 3 32 Cruise COMON irienn iaaa aE aA 3 10 Charging System Light cccccccesecseseeeeeeees 3 33 Exterior Lamps SORES EEE EEEEEEEESES 3 14 Voltmeter Gage eccccccecccessesscessesseesesereeeeeess 3 34 Headlamps on ROMINGGN necececcectecnncnstweaninnsene 3 15 Brake System Warni
39. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads e You can tow in DRIVE D You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often e g under heavy loads and or hilly conditions See Tow Haul Mode later in this section Three important considerations have to do with weight e the weight of the trailer e the weight of the trailer tongue e and the weight on your vehicle s tires Tow Haul Mode Tow haul is designed to assist while your vehicle is pulling a large or heavy load or trailer Tow haul is most useful while pulling such a load in rolling terrain in stop and go traffic or when you need improved low speed control such as when parking The purpose of the tow haul mode is to do the following e Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load e Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when the vehicle is unloaded e Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load Tow haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent of the vehicle s Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR See Weight of the Trailer later in this section 4
40. This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and will only work when the information is available In rare cases a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station While the radio is tuned to an RDS station the station name or call letters will appear on the display instead of the frequency RDS stations may also provide the time of day a program type PTY for current programming and the name of the program being broadcast 3 65 XM Satellite Radio Service XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States XM offers 100 coast to coast channels including music news sports talk and children s programming XM provides digital quality audio and text information that includes song title and artist name A service fee is required in order to receive the XM service For more information contact XM at www xmradio com or call 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 Playing the Radio PWR Power Press this knob to turn the system on and off lt voL Volume Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume INFO Information Press this knob to switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time When the ignition is off press this knob to display the time For RDS press the INFO knob to change what appears on the display while usi
41. above A driver with a BAC level of 0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision At a BAC level of 0 10 percent the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater at a level of 0 15 percent the chance is 25 times greater The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up I will be careful is not the right answer What if there is an emergency a need to take sudden action as when a child darts into the street A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision There is something else about drinking and driving that many people do not know Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Please do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking Ride home ina cab or if you are with a group designate a driver who
42. activate the lamp and illuminate an indicator light near the button Pressing the button again will turn off the roof mounted lamp If your vehicle has this button your vehicle may have the snow plow prep package For further information see Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on page 4 52 Exterior Cargo Lamps You can use the cargo lamps if you need more light in the cargo area of your vehicle or in the top box storage units Some vehicles will only have a cargo lamp in the passenger side top box Press the button with this symbol to turn the cargo lamps on or off a The cargo lamps symbol light will come on in the instrument panel cluster when the cargo lamps are on and the ignition key is turned to run Instrument Panel Brightness The thumbwheel for this feature is located next to the exterior lamps control ex Instrument Panel Lights Turn the thumbwheel up or down to brighten or dim the instrument panel lights and the radio display This will only work if the headlamps or parking lamps are on To turn on the dome lamps with the vehicle doors closed turn the thumbwheel all the way up 3 17 Dome Lamps The dome lamps will come on when you open a door or the midgate if equipped and will turn off when all doors or midgate are closed You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the thumbwheel located next to the exterior lamp control all the way up In this position the dome lamps will remain
43. and help save both batteries And it could save the radio 5 45 4 Open the hood and locate the positive and negative terminal locations on the other vehicle Your vehicle has a remote positive jump starting terminal and a remote negative jump starting terminal You should always use these remote terminals instead of the terminals on the battery The remote positive terminal is located near the engine accessory drive bracket On some vehicles the terminal may be covered under a red plastic cover To access the remote positive Vortec 8100 Engine terminal open the red plastic cover 5 46 The remote negative terminal is located on the engine accessory drive bracket and is marked GND for all Vortec 5300 engines It is located on the thermostat housing and marked GND for all Vortec 8100 engines Vortec 5300 Engine See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for more information on location An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sure the battery has enough water You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle But if a battery has filler caps b
44. away For more information see CHECK OIL LEVEL under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 You should check your engine oil level regularly this is an added reminder Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for the location of the engine oil dipstick 1 Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you do not do this the oil dipstick might not show the actual level 2 Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level 5 17 8 1L Engine All Other Engines When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is at or below the cross hatched area at the tip of the dipstick then you will need to add at least one quart of oil But you must use the right kind This section explains what kind of oil to use For engine oil crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications on page 5 114 Notice Do not add too much oil If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range your engine could be damaged See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for the location of the
45. back to nature Off road driving involves some new skills And that is why it is very important that you read this guide You will find many driving tips and suggestions These will help make your off road driving safer and more enjoyable Before You Go Off Roading There are some things to do before you go out For example be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done Check to make sure all underbody shields if equipped are properly attached Be sure you read all the information about your four wheel drive vehicle in this manual Is there enough fuel Is the spare tire fully inflated Are the fluid levels up where they should be What are the local laws that apply to off roading where you will be driving If you do not know you should check with law enforcement people in the area Will you be on someone s private land If so be sure to get the necessary permission Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle e The heaviest things should be on the load floor and forward of your rear axle Put heavier items as far forward as you can e Be sure the load is secured properly so driving on the off road terrain does not toss things around e Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop You or your passengers could be injured Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks Unsecured
46. batteries to make sure they are not dead or installed incorrectly The parental control button might have been turned on The power indicator light will flash If the stop button was pressed one time the DVD player will resume playing where the DVD was stopped If the stop button was pressed two times the DVD player will begin to play from the beginning of the DVD Recommended Action The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture or sound My disc is stuck in the player The Load Eject button does not work Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or buzzes Check that the DVD player is in the auxiliary source mode Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices Turn the DVD power off then on then press the load eject button on the DVD player Do not attempt to forcibly remove the disc from the DVD player This could permanently damage the disc and DVD player Check for obstructions low batteries reception range and interference from cellular telephone towers or by using your cellular telephone in the vehicle Check that the headphones are facing the front of the vehicle Recommended Action lost the remote and or See your dealer for the headphones assistance The DVD is playing Check that the DVD player is in DVD mode but there is no picture or sound The audio video skips The DVD or CD could be or jumps dirty scratched or damaged The audio
47. battery Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Your vehicle s remote negative terminal is marked GND Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable does not go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery Connect the other end of the negative cable at least 18 inches 45 cm away from the dead battery but not near engine parts that move The electrical connection is just as good there and the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for awhile Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery If it will not start after a few tries it probably needs service Notice lf the jumper cables are removed in the To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do wrong order electrical shorting may occur and the following damage the vehicle The repairs would not be 1 Disconnect the black negative cable from the covered by your warranty Remove the jumper vehicle that had the dead battery cables in the correct order making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal 2 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery 3 Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good
48. belt must be used by only one person at a time 1 30 Never do this Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt but the shoulder part is behind the child If the child wears the belt in this way in a crash the child might slide under the belt The belt s force would then be applied right on the child s abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries Wherever the child sits the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the child s thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash 1 31 Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by appropriate restraints Young children should not use the vehicle s adult safety belts alone unless there is no other choice Instead they need to use a child restraint 1 32 People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle A baby does not weigh much until a crash During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible
49. bow end in first 2 83 e When placing the bows locate the small notches arrow in the side rails These notches receive the tang on the bow ends and help the bows seat into place e When reinstalling the tonneau cover start at the front near the cab Place the plastic lip into the front rail then the rear rail and finish with the side rails To clean the tonneau cover use mild soap and water If necessary use a soft bristle brush to remove dirt trapped in the grain of the material 2 84 Sunroof The vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding sunroof To open or close your sunroof the ignition needs to be on or RAP needs to be active See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 29 Press and release the rear side of the button located in the front overhead console to express open the glass panel and sunshade To close the glass panel press and hold the front of the button The glass will not be fully seated unless the button is held until the glass stops moving With the sunroof closed press the forward side of the button to open the sunroof to the vent position The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which can be pulled forward to block sun rays If a hand arm or other object is blocking the sunroof glass panel as it is closing the glass panel will stop at the obstruction After the obstruction is removed the glass panel can be closed or opened Use care not to leave the sunroof open f
50. cab model and it runs out of fuel refuel the front fuel tank first to ensure a quick restart Be careful not to spill fuel Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 99 When replacing the fuel cap turn it to the right clockwise until it clicks It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap on the last turn as you tighten it Make sure the cap is fully installed The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 39 If a fire starts while you are refueling do not remove the nozzle Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant Leave the area immediately Notice If you need a new fuel cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 39 Filling a Portable Fuel Container Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor You can be badly burned and your vehicl
51. can be very hot Do not touch them If you do you can be burned Do not run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle 5 34 Notice Engine damage from running your engine without coolant is not covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 32 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL may cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant may require changing sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in your vehicle If there seems to be no leak and your vehicle is equipped with an electric engine cooling fan with the engine on check to see if the cooling fan is running If it is not your vehicle needs service Turn off the engine If there seems to be no leak and your vehicle is equipped with an engine driven cooling fan start the engine again and see if the fan speed increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down If it does not your vehicle needs service Turn off the engine How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank If you have not found a problem yet check to see if coolant is
52. checks to insure there are no problems You may hear or feel the system working This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with your vehicle The system should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph 32 km h In some cases it may take approximately two miles of driving before the system initializes If the system fails to turn on or activate the STABILITY SYS DISABLED or SERVICE STABILITY message will be displayed If the vehicle has gone through heavy acceleration or braking or multiple turns during the first two miles of driving after starting your vehicle the STABILITY SYS DISABLED message may appear If this is the case your vehicle does not need servicing You will need to turn the vehicle off and then restart it to initialize StabiliTrak If either message appears on the Driver Information Center DIC and your vehicle hasn t gone through hard acceleration braking or multiple turns in the first two miles of driving your vehicle should be taken in for service The STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will appear on the Driver Information Center DIC only when the system is both on and activated It means that an advanced computer controlled system has come on to help your vehicle continue to go in the direction in which you re steering StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses that your vehicle is just starting to spin as it might if you hit a patch of ice or other slippery spot on the road When the s
53. child riding in a booster seat Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger s frontal CAUTION Continued 1 38 airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off General Motors recommends that rear facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off If you need to secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat Do not use child restraints in the center front seat position The restraints will not work properly Wherever you install it be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
54. collection Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393 or 366 0123 in the Washington D C area or write to NHTSA U S Department of Transportation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should immediately notify Transport Canada in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited You may write to Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Tower C Ottawa Ontario K1A ON5 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this we certainly hope you will notify General Motors Please call the Chevrolet Customer
55. could be costly But the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage When you read other manuals you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words There are also warning labels on the vehicle They use the same words CAUTION or NOTICE Vehicle Symbols The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator If you need help figuring out a specific name of a component gage or indicator reference the following topics e Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1 e Features and Controls in Section 2 e Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3 e Climate Controls in Section 3 e Warning Lights Gages and Indicators in Section 3 e Audio System s in Section 3 e Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5 These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle CAUTION POSSIBLE INJURY PROTECT EYES BY SHIELDING CAUSTIC BATTERY ACID COULD CAUSE BURNS AVOID SPARKS OR FLAMES SPARK OR FLAME COULD EXPLODE BATTERY LATCH BOTH LAP AND SHOULDER BELTS TO PROTECT OCCUPANT DO NOT TWIST SAFETY BELT WHEN ATTACHING FASTEN SEAT BELTS MOVE SEAT FULLY REARWARD SECURE CHILD SEAT Vs PULL BELT OUT COMPLETELY THEN SECURE Ve YQ CHILD SEAT POWER t winpow B AIR BA
56. cursor around the DVD menu After making a selection press the enter button This button only operates when playing a DVD C Set up Menu Press this button to adjust the color tint brightness contrast display mode and dynamic range compression The dynamic range compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio and increase low audio produced by some DVDs To change a feature back to the factory default setting press this button to display the feature then press and hold this button The default setting will appear on the display While playing an Audio or DVD disc press and hold this button to display and to remove the track and time information A W lt Menu Navigation Arrows Use the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu gt Enter Press this button to select the choices that are highlighted in any menu 3 93 Playing a Disc To play a disc gently insert the disc with the label side up into the loading slot The DVD player will continue loading the disc and the player will automatically start if the vehicle is in RUN ACCESSORY or when RAP is active If a disc is already in the player press the play pause button on the DVD player faceplate or on the remote control Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping of the copyright information or the previews Some DVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished If the DVD does not begin to play the main title refer to the
57. driving In recent years more than 16 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with more than 300 000 people injured Many adults by some estimates nearly half the adult population choose never to drink alcohol so they never drive after drinking For persons under 21 it is against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive But what if people do How much is too much if someone plans to drive It is a lot less than many might think Although it depends on each person and situation here is some general information on the problem The Blood Alcohol Concentration BAC of someone who is drinking depends upon four things e The amount of alcohol consumed e The drinker s body weight e The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol According to the American Medical Association a 180 lb 82 kg person who drinks three 12 ounce 355 ml bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0 06 percent The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce 120 ml glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounces 45 ml of liquors like whiskey gin or vodka
58. engine oil fill cap SAE 5W 30 AR Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are through What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for two things e GM6094M Your vehicle s engine requires oil meeting GM Standard GM6094M You should look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M e SAE 5W 30 RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINEOLS As shown in the viscosity chart SAE 5W 30 is best for your vehicle These numbers on an oil container show its LOOK FOR viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity THIS SYMBOL FOR lt oils such as SAE 20W 50 HOT AND GM WEATHER STANDARD GM6094M Oils meeting these requirements should also have the starburst symbol on the container This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API You should look for this information on the oil container and use only those oils that are identified as meeting SAE 5W 30 GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container Notice Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines DO NOT USE SAE 10W 40 SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended VISCOSITY GRADE QIL NOT RECOMMENDED oil can result in engine dama
59. every three seconds To scroll through the message press and release the INFO button A new group of words will appear on the display after every press of this button Once the complete message has been displayed INFO will disappear from the display until another new message is received The last message can be displayed by pressing the INFO button You can view the last message until a new message is received or a different station is tuned to Radio Messages CAL ERR Calibration Error The audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory If CAL ERR appears on the display it means that the radio has not been configured properly for the vehicle and must be returned to your GM dealer for service LOCKED This message is displayed when the THEFTLOCK system has locked up Take the vehicle to your GM dealer for service If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your GM dealer 3 81 XM Radio Messages Radio Display sii P XL Explicit Language XL on the radio display These channels or any others can be blocked at a Channels after the channel name customer s request by calling 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 indicates content with explicit language Updating Updating The encryption code in the receiver is being updated and encryption code no action is required This process should take no longer than 30 seconds No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning cor
60. following distance Expect to move slightly slower at night When you want to leave the freeway move to the proper lane well in advance If you miss your exit do not under any circumstances stop and back up Drive on to the next exit The exit ramp can be curved sometimes quite sharply The exit speed is usually posted Reduce your speed according to your speedometer not to your sense of motion After driving for any distance at higher speeds you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are 4 36 Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you are ready Try to be well rested If you must start when you are not fresh such as after a day s work do not plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in Is your vehicle ready for a long trip If you keep it serviced and maintained it is ready to go If it needs service have it done before starting out Of course you will find experienced and able service experts in GM dealerships all across North America They will be ready and willing to help if you need it Here are some things you can check before a trip e Windshield Washer Fluid Is the reservoir full Are all windows clean inside and outside e Wiper Blades Are they in good shape e Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids Have you checked all levels e Lamps Are they all working Are the lenses clean e Tires They are vita
61. free of ice snow or any other obstruction such as leaves The heater and defroster will work far better reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows e Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle e Adding outside equipment to the front of your vehicle such as hood air deflectors etc may affect the performance of the heating and air conditioning system Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle Warning Lights Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages on your vehicle The pictures will help you locate them Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury 3 28 Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions As you will see in the details on the next few pages some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they re working If you are familiar with this section you should not be alarmed when this happens Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there s a problem with your vehicle When o
62. going up steep hills you may want to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed When going downhill you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down Of course applying the brake takes you out of cruise control Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills Ending Cruise Control To turn off the cruise control do one of the following e Step lightly on the brake pedal e move the cruise control switch to off or e shift the transmission to NEUTRAL N e If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak feature cruise control will turn off if road conditions cause StabiliTrak to activate e If the accelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds cruise control will turn off The cruise control will turn off automatically if the traction control system or StabiliTrak system activate if your vehicle is equipped with either feature Erasing Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition your cruise control set speed memory is erased 3 13 Exterior Lamps The control on the driver s side of your instrument panel operates the exterior lamps The exterior lamp control has four positions O Off Turn the knob to this position and release it to turn off all exterior lamps including the DRL To turn any lamps back on when in the off mode turn the knob to the desired lamp mode To return to the AUTO mode turn the knob to the of
63. grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 5 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate 5 73 Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustain
64. have it fixed so it will be there to warn you if the system is turned off If the light stays on or comes on when you re driving there may be a problem with your Traction Assist System and your vehicle may need service When this light is on the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly The traction off light may come on for the following reasons e If you turn the system off by pressing the TAS on off button located to the left of the steering wheel the light will come on and stay on To turn the system back on press the button again the light should go off e If you move the shift lever to FIRST 1 the light will come on and stay on to indicate that the traction system is off This is normal operation To turn the system back on move the shift lever back to a position other than FIRST 1 the light should go off See Traction Assist System TAS on page 4 8 e The light will come on and stay on if the TAS automatic engagement feature has been turned off To turn the system on press the TAS off on button the light should go off To turn the automatic engagement feature back on see Traction Assist System TAS on page 4 8 e If the Traction Assist System is affected by an anti lock brake system TAS or engine related problem the system will turn off and the light will come on Have your vehicle serviced e If the vehicle is driven over an extremely rough road the system will turn off and th
65. ignition door key to unlock lock it Press the key cylinder button and swing the lid open Turn on the cargo lamps if equipped if you need more light inside See Cargo Lamps under Exterior Lamps on page 3 14 for more information on cargo lamps 2 77 Tonneau Cover Your vehicle may be equipped with a tonneau cover The main components of the tonneau cover are the following Improperly stored tonneau cover components could be thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver You or others could be injured If you remove the cover bows and rails always store them properly in the cargo area When you put them back always be sure that they are securely reattached A Front Rail D Rear Rail B Bows E Plastic Lip C Side Rails F Loop 2 78 Removing the Tonneau Cover 2 Pull the back of the cover out from the rear rail D 1 Starting at the rear corner of the driver s side of the vehicle pull the loop F toward you and then pull up so the plastic lip E releases from the channel in the rear rail D and the side rail C 2 79 3 Roll the cover toward the front of the vehicle The 4 Stow the cover using the buckles and the straps plastic lip E will release from the siderails C as attached to the front rail you roll the cover forward You can also store the tonneau cover outside of the vehicle or use the storage bag included 2 80 To use the storage bag do the follow
66. in a drive gear this message will appear on the display and you will hear a chime Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstacles and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC Pressing any of the four DIC buttons if equipped will clear the message from the DIC display If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clear the message from the DIC display 3 54 SERVICE 4WD If a problem occurs with the four wheel drive system this message will appear on the DIC If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the four wheel drive system needs service See your GM dealer Pressing any of the four DIC buttons if equipped will clear the message from the DIC display If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clear the message from the DIC display SERVICE AIR BAG If there is a problem with the airbag system this message will be displayed on the DIC Have your GM dealer inspect the system for problems See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 31 and Airbag System on page 1 49 for more information Pressing any of the four DIC buttons if equipped will clear the message from the DIC display If your vehicle is
67. in the locked position The latches are in the locked position when they are parallel to the front and back edge of the panel Use the following instructions for the proper storage sequence and location for each panel Panels 3 2 1 Loaded 2 65 3 Store cargo panel 2 by loading the cargo panel with latches down and facing toward you 2 Starting with cargo panel 1 load the cargo panel with latches at the top of the bag and facing away from you 2 66 4 Store cargo panel 3 by loading the cargo panel with 6 Tighten both straps on the bag by pulling on the latches at the top of the bag and facing toward you free end of the straps 5 Zip the bag shut 7 Close both top and bottom lever locks at the center of the bag to secure tightly 2 68 Reinstalling the Cargo Cover Panels You only need to reinstall as many cargo panels as you wish 1 Remove the cargo panel s from the storage bag You can either leave the bag attached to the side of the cargo area while it is not in use or you can store it outside of the vehicle 2 Starting with cargo panel 1 place the latches in the unlocked position Place cargo panel 1 on the cargo area rails while holding the back of the cargo panel up Left Side Shown Right Side Similar Push the panel forward until it is snug against the midgate and then let the back of the panel down being sure that the pegs align with the recei
68. lit secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your dealer To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Airbag System Your vehicle has airbags a frontal airbag for the driver and another frontal airbag for the right front passenger Your vehicle may also have side impact airbags Side impact airbags are available for the driver and right front passenger If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the driver and or the right front passenger the words AIR BAG will appear on the airbag covering on the side of the seatback closest to the door Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations 1 49 Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt even if you have airbags Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Airbags are designed to work with safety belts but do not replace them Frontal airbags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to deploy o
69. make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so The airbag system does not need regular maintenance 1 62 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Q Is there anything might add to the front or sides of the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly A Yes If you add things that change your vehicle s frame bumper system front end or side sheet metal or height they may keep the airbag system from working properly Also the airbag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag sensors If you have any questions about this you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7 2 Q Because have a disability have to get my A vehicle modified How can find out whether this will affect my advanced airbag system Changing or moving any parts of the front seats safety belts the airbag sensing and diagnostic module located under the driver s seat or the inside rearview mirror can affect the operation of the advanced airbag system If you have questions call Customer Assistance The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7 2 Re
70. miles or kilometers To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information press and hold the select button for one second while in one of the trip modes This will reset the information for TRIP A or TRIP B You can also reset TRIP A or TRIP B while they are displayed by pressing the reset stem on the cluster If you press and hold the reset stem or the select button for four seconds the display will show the distance traveled since the last ignition cycle for TRIP A or TRIP B Timer The DIC can be used as a timer Press the select button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset not including time the ignition is off Time will continue to be counted as long as the ignition is on even if another display is being shown on the DIC The timer will record up to 99 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds 99 59 59 after which the display will roll back to zero To stop the counting of time press the select button briefly while TIMER is displayed To reset the timer to zero press and hold the select button while TIMER is displayed Engine Hours Press the trip information button until ENGINE HOURS appears on the display This mode shows the total number of hours the engine has run Pressing and holding the reset stem located on the instrument cluster for about four seconds will also display the engine hour information after the odometer is displayed when the
71. modules are located inside the steering wheel and instrument panel For vehicles with side impact airbags the airbag modules are located in the seatback closest to the driver s and or right front passenger s door 1 55 How Does an Airbag Restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel In moderate to severe side collisions even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle The airbag supplements the protection provided by safety belts Airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually But the frontal airbags would not help you in many types of collisions including rollovers rear impacts and many side impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward the airbag Side impact airbags would not help you in many types of collisions including frontal or near frontal collisions rollovers and rear impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward those airbags Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions for the driver s and right front passenger s frontal airbags and only in moderate to severe side collisions for vehicles with a driver s and right front passenger s side impact airbag 1 56 What Will You See A
72. more information on driving through water 4 29 After Off Road Driving Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody chassis or under the hood These accumulations can be a fire hazard After operation in mud or sand have the brake linings cleaned and checked These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking Check the body structure steering suspension wheels tires and exhaust system for damage Also check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off road use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information 4 30 Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue Here are some tips on night driving Drive defensively e Do not drink and drive e Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you e Since you cannot see as well you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles e Slow down especially on higher speed roads Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead e In remote areas watch for animals e If you are tired pull off the road in a safe place and rest No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver may requi
73. needs service Gasoline Specifications It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications which were developed by automobile manufacturers around the world and contained in the World Wide Fuel Charter which is available from the Alliance of Automobile Manufacturers at www autoalliance org fuel_charter htm Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasoline California Fuel If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards see the underhood emission control label it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog check test See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 39 If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs may not be covered by your warranty Additives To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming allowing your emission control system to work properly In most cases you should not ha
74. not covered by your warranty If the brake traction control system activates constantly or if the brakes have heated up due to high speed braking brake traction control will be disabled and the TRACTION SYS LIMITED message will be displayed In the limited mode the traction control system will only use engine traction control and is limited in its ability to provide optimal performance since the system will not utilize brake traction control to control slip on the drive wheels The system will return to normal operation after the brakes have cooled This can take up to two minutes or longer depending on brake usage Notice lf you allow the wheel s of one axle to spin excessively while the traction off ABS and brake warning lights and the SERVICE STABILITY message are displayed you could damage the transfer case The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel s excessively while these lights and this message are displayed The traction control system may activate on dry or rough roads or under conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts downshifts of the transmission When this happens you may notice a reduction in acceleration or may hear a noise or vibration This is normal If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system activates the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will appear on the Driver Information Center and the cruise control will automatic
75. not equipped with the four DIC buttons pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clear the message from the DIC display SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM If a problem occurs with the brake system this message will appear on the DIC If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the brake system needs service See your GM dealer Pressing any of the four DIC buttons if equipped will clear the message from the DIC display If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clear the message from the DIC display SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEM On some vehicles if there is a problem with the battery charging system this message will appear on the DIC Under certain conditions the charging system light may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster See Charging System Light on page 3 33 The battery will not be charging at an optimal rate and the vehicle will lose the ability to enter the fuel economy mode The vehicle is safe to drive however you should have the electrical system checked by your GM dealer Pressing any of the four DIC buttons if equipped will clear the message from the DIC display If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clear the message from t
76. on page 4 18 4 51 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment Before installing a snow plow on your vehicle here are some things you will need to know Notice If your vehicle does not have the snow plow prep package adding a plow can damage your vehicle and the repairs would not be covered by warranty Unless your vehicle was built to carry a snow plow do not add one to your vehicle If your vehicle has the snow plow option called RPO VYU snow plow prep package then the payload your vehicle can carry will be reduced when a snow plow is installed Your vehicle can be damaged if either the front or rear axle ratings or the GVW are exceeded Q How do know if my vehicle can handle a snow plow Some vehicles are built with a special package called RPO VYU snow plow prep package If your vehicle has this option you can add a plow to it provided certain weights such as the weights on the vehicle s axles and the GVW are not exceeded 4 52 Q How heavy can a snow plow safely be A The plow your vehicle can carry depends on many things such as e The options your vehicle came with and the weight of those options e The weight and number of passengers you intend to carry e The weight of items you have added to your vehicle like a tool box or truck cap e The total weight of any additional cargo you intend to carry Say for example you have a 700 Ib 318 kg snow plow The total weight of
77. on screen instructions Stopping and Resuming Playback To stop playing a disc press and release the stop button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control To resume playback press the play pause button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control The movie should resume play from where it was last stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice If the disc has been ejected or if the stop button has been pressed twice the disc will resume play at the beginning 3 94 Ejecting a Disc Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate to eject the disc There is not an eject button on the remote control If a disc is ejected from the player but is not removed the DVD player will reload the disc after a short period of time The disc will be stored in the DVD player The DVD player will not resume play of the disc automatically Remote Control To use the remote control aim it at the transmitter window below the video screen and press the desired button Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the ability of the RSE system to receive signals from the remote control If the remote control does not seem to be working the batteries may need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the function of the remote control Notice Storing the remote control in a hot area or in direct s
78. on whether a door is opened or closed A Dome Override Press this button located below the exterior lamp control to turn dome lamps off even while a door is opened To return the lamps to automatic operation press the button again and it will return to the out position In this position the dome lamps will come on when you open a door Entry Exit Lighting Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry exit feature When a door is opened or the key is removed from the ignition the dome lamps will come on if the dome override button is in the out position Reading Lamps If your vehicle has reading lamps press the button located next to the lamp to turn it on or off The lamps can be adjusted to point in the direction you want Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in other locations To turn on or off press the button located next to the lamp The lamps cannot be adjusted Battery Run Down Protection This feature shuts off the dome lamps if they are left on for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is in lock This will keep your battery from running down Accessory Power Outlets Your vehicle may be equipped with two accessory power outlets located on the instrument panel Your vehicle may also have an outlet on the back of the center console above the cupholder door Notice Adding any electrical equipment to your vehicle may damage it or keep other components from working as they should T
79. other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect your vehicle s emission controls and may cause this light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test 3 39 This light should come on as a check to show you it is working when the ignition is on and the engine is not running If the light does not come on have it repaired This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways e Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle Diagnosis and service may be required e Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle Diagnosis and service may be required If the Light is Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle e Reducing vehicle speed e Avoiding hard accelerations e Avoiding steep uphill grades e If you are towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light stops flashing and remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following 3 40 If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park your vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and res
80. portion of each panel The panels are labeled 1 2 and 3 There are also numbered labels on the bottom of the panels The numbers on the top and bottom of the panels will be used as reference when removing storing and reinstalling the panels 2 Remove cargo panel 3 by pulling the left and right cargo panel latches located on the bottom of each cargo panel toward you to unlock the cargo panel latches 3 Pull the cargo panel up and then out from the side rails and set it aside You only need to remove as many cargo panels as needed for your cargo carrying needs 4 Remove cargo panel 2 if you need to in the same way and set it aside 2 63 5 Remove cargo panel 1 if you need to but notice that there are four latches to release two left side latches and two right side latches Set the panel aside After you have removed each cargo panel you can store it within the cargo storage area using the cargo panel storage system 2 64 Cargo Panel Storage System The three cargo panels can be stored on either the driver s or passenger s side of the cargo box using the storage bag To store the panels do the following 1 Secure the storage bag in the cargo storage area by attaching the four clips on the cargo bag to the tie down locations on either side of the storage area Always use the storage bag to store the cargo panels during driving Before storing the cargo panels be sure that the latches are
81. position a child on a continuous flat surface Make sure that the infant s head rests toward the center of the vehicle 1 35 A forward facing child seat C E provides restraint for the child s body with the harness and also sometimes with surfaces such as T shaped or shelf like shields 1 36 A booster seat F G is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner and some high back booster seats have a five point harness A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window Q How do child restraints work A A child restraint system is any device designed for use in a motor vehicle to restrain seat or position children A built in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle An add on child restraint system is a portable one which is purchased by the vehicle s owner For many years add on child restraints have used the adult belt system in the vehicle To help reduce the chance of injury the child also has to be secured within the restraint The vehicle s belt system secures the add on child restraint in the vehicle and the add on child restraint s harness system holds the child in place within the restraint One system the three point harness has straps that come down over each of the infant s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch The five point harness system has two shoulder
82. press the select button while DISPLAY UNITS is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices e DISPLAY UNITS ENGLISH e DISPLAY UNITS METRIC If you choose English all information will be displayed in English units For example distance in miles and fuel economy in miles per gallon Choose one of the available options and press the customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and end out of the customizable options 3 63 Audio System s Notice Before adding any sound equipment to your vehicle like a tape player CB radio mobile telephone or two way radio make sure that it can be added by checking with your dealer Also check federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units If sound equipment can be added it is very important to do it properly Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle s engine radio or other systems and even damage them Your vehicle s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle find out what your audio system can do and how to operate all of its controls Your vehicle may have a feature called Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 29 for more information 3 64 Setting
83. radio display The current radio source will stop and the DVD sound will come through the speakers To stop listening to the DVD press the CD AUX button if a CD is loaded or press the BAND button to select a different source When the RSE system is turned off the DVD symbol will go off of the radio display and RSE OFF will appear on the radio display The radio will return to the last radio source that you were listening to See Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 3 89 for more information Rear Seat Entertainment System Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system The RSE system includes a DVD player a video display screen two sets of wireless headphones and a remote control Parental Control This button is located behind the video screen Press this button while a DVD or CD is playing to freeze the video and mute the audio The video screen will display Parental Control ON and the power indicator light on the DVD player will flash It will also disable all other button operations from the remote control and the DVD player with the exception of the eject button Press this button again to restore operation of the DVD player This button may also be used to turn the DVD player power on and automatically resume play if the ignition is in RUN ACCESSORY or if RAP is active Before You Drive The RSE system is for rear seat passengers only The driver cannot safely view the video screen while
84. side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road Hydroplaning does not happen often But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road If you can see reflections from trees telephone poles or other vehicles and raindrops dimple the water s surface there could be hydroplaning Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds There just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when it is raining Driving Through Deep Standing Water Notice If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water water can come in through your engine s air intake and badly damage your engine Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water drive through them very slowly Driving Through Flowing Water Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces If you try to drive through flowing water as you might at a low wa
85. so it does not fall forward Turn the midgate handle clockwise and pull the midgate toward you Lowering the Midgate with the Rear Glass in the Storage Pocket 3 Lower the midgate until it is flat Rear Glass Stored in Glass Storage Pocket Midgate Lowered with Crossbar Attached This procedure works the same as the procedure described previously but when you lower the midgate with the rear glass in the stored position you will notice that the entire crossbar will lower with the midgate This is completely normal however since the crossbar lowers with the midgate it will be heavier As you lower the midgate be ready for the extra weight and do not let the midgate fall as you lower it 2 22 Raising the Midgate To return the midgate to its normal position raise the midgate up with a firm swinging motion until it latches into place securely This will help to ensure that the midgate closes with enough force to engage the latches If the rear glass is removed and you would like to put it back do so using the instructions given previously Tailgate Use the ignition door key to unlock lock the tailgate Open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle while pulling the tailgate toward you To shut the tailgate firmly push it upward until it latches Push and pull on the tailgate to be sure it is latched securely Tailgate Removal The tailgate can be removed to allow for different loading situations Although
86. some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable See Off Road Driving with Your Four Wheel Drive Vehicle on page 4 18 for information about driving off road e Keep your vehicle in good shape Check all fluid levels and also the brakes tires cooling system and transmission These parts can work hard on mountain roads e Know how to go down hills The most important thing to know is this let your engine do some of the slowing down Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill If you do not shift down your brakes could get so hot that they would not work well You Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope 4 38 Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL N or with the ignition off is dangerous Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down They could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill Know how to go uphill You may want to shift down to a lower gear The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission and you can climb the hill better Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane roads in hills or mountains Do n
87. straps two hip straps and a crotch strap A shield may take the place of hip straps A T shaped shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child s body A shelf or armrest type shield has straps that are attached to a wide shelf like shield that swings up or to the side When choosing a child restraint be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle If it is it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards Then follow the instructions for the restraint You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both These restraints use the belt system or the LATCH system in your vehicle but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer 1 37 Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat General Motors recommends that child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant riding in a rear facing infant seat a child riding in a forward facing child seat and an older
88. surfaces within legal driving limits e are driven off road in the recommended manner See Off Road Driving with Your Four Wheel Drive Vehicle on page 4 18 e use the recommended fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 should be performed when indicated See Additional Required Services on page 6 6 and Maintenance Footnotes on page 6 8 for further information Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a qualified technician do the work Some maintenance services can be complex So unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment you should have your GM Goodwrench dealer do these jobs When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your service needs you will know that GM trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM parts If you want to purchase service information see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 11 6 3 Owner Checks and Services on page 6 9 tells you what should be checked when to check it and what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition The proper replacement parts fluids and lubricants to use are listed i
89. the Time The radio may have a button marked with an H or HR to represent hours and an M or MN to represent minutes Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour appears on the display Press and hold the minute button until the correct minute appears on the display The time can be set with the ignition on or off To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting Radio Data System RDS information press and hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time until RDS TIME appears on the display To accept this time press and hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time for another two seconds If the time is not available from the station NO UPDAT will appear on the display RDS time is broadcast once a minute After tuning to an RDS broadcast station it may take a few minutes for the time to update Radio with CD EEK 1 2 3 4 5 6 pev _ Bet Sy AUDIO cD AUTO AUTO eno i Ki fees e Base Radio Shown Bose Similar If your vehicle has the Bose audio system your vehicle will have six Bose amplified speakers Radio Data System RDS The audio system has a Radio Data System RDS RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information With RDS the radio can do the following e Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming e Receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies e Display messages from radio stations
90. the alarm is active ALARM WARNING LAMPS The headlamps will flash when the alarm is active Choose one of the available options and press the customization button while your choice is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature For more information on alarm warning type see Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 26 Language To select your preference for display language press the select button while LANGUAGE is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following languages e ENGLISH e FRANCAIS French e ESPANOL Spanish Choose one of the available options and press the customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it If you accidentally choose a language that you do not want or understand press and hold the customization button and the trip information button at the same time The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages in their particular language English will be in English Francais will be in French and Espanol will be in Spanish When you see the language that you would like release both buttons The DIC will then display the information in the language you chose You can also scroll through the different languages by pressing and holding the trip reset stem for four seconds as long as you are in the odometer mode Display Units Press the customization button until DISPLAY UNITS appears in the display To select English or metric
91. the left of the TEMP button will turn on or off to indicate when the feature is on Once the mirror is turned off it will remain off until it is turned back on or until the vehicle is restarted Compass Operation Press the COMP button once briefly to turn the compass on or off When the ignition is started and the compass feature is on the compass will show two character boxes for approximately two seconds After two seconds the mirror will display the compass heading Compass Calibration The compass may need calibration if one of the following occurs e If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle e After approximately five seconds the display does not show a compass heading N for North for example there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item e The compass does not display the correct heading and the compass zone variance is set correctly In order to calibrate CAL must be displayed in the mirror compass windows If CAL is not displayed push in the COMP button for approximately eight seconds or until CAL is displayed The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in circles at 5 mph 8 km h or less until the display reads a direction 2 49 Compass Variance The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory It will be necessary to adjust the compas
92. the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first Vehicle Care Appearance Materials See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing the following products Description Usage Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior Wax Treated polishing cloth Tar and Road Removes tar road oil Oil Remover and asphalt Chrome Cleaner Use on chrome or and Polish stainless steel White Sidewall Removes soil and black Tire Cleaner marks from whitewalls Cleans vinyl tops Vinyl Cleaner upholstery and convertible tops Removes dirt grime smoke and fingerprints Removes dirt and grime from chrome wheels and wire wheel covers Removes dust fingerprints and surface contaminants Spray on and wipe off Glass Cleaner Chrome and Wire Wheel Cleaner Finish Enhancer Description Usas Removes swirl marks fine Swirl Remover Polish scratches and other light surface contamination Removes light scratches Cleans shines and oom Ue Shine protects in one step No wiping necessary Medium foaming shampoo Cleans and lightly waxes Biodegradable and phosphate free Quickly removes spots and stains from carpets vinyl and cloth upholstery Odorless spray odor Odor Eliminator eliminator used on fabrics vinyl leather and carpet See your General Motors parts department for these product
93. the proper coolant mixture 5 35 If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left A CAUTION 2 Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine a eh we WE nn 3 Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture to the FULL COLD mark 1 You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise left about one full turn 5 36 4 With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the engine cooling fan By this time the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark 5 Then replace the pressure cap Be sure the pressure cap is hand tight and fully seated Engine Fan Noise If your vehicle is equipped with a clutched engine cooling fan when the clutch is engaged the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine In most everyday driving conditions the fan is spinning slowe
94. the system on the passenger s side of the vehicle The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off This is possible since outside air will always flow through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode See Recirculation later in this section Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or increase the cabin temperature The display will show the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and an arrow pointing to the passenger will be displayed under and to the right of the temperature setting The passenger s temperature setting can be set to match the driver s temperature setting by pressing and holding the AUTO button for four seconds Both the driver and passenger arrows will be displayed 3 23 Automatic Operation AUTO Automatic When automatic operation is active the system will control the inside temperature the air delivery and the fan speed Use the steps below to place the entire system in automatic mode 1 Press the AUTO button When AUTO is selected the display will change to show the current driver s set temperature delivery mode and fan speed Press the AUTO button again within five seconds to display the passenger s set temperature If the driver s and passenger s temperature settings are the same when AUTO is pressed the temperature setting and both arrows will be displayed for five seconds along with the automatic air del
95. the tailgate can be removed without assistance you may want someone to assist you with the removal to avoid possible damage to the vehicle To remove the tailgate do the following 1 Hold the tailgate up slightly raised aes 2 Release the retaining cable clip by lifting the cable so it is level with the ground and then push the cable clip toward ihe venici 3 Raise the tailgate at a slight upward angle pull back on the tailgate at the right edge so it releases from the block hinge and then move the tailgate to the right to release the left edge Reverse the above procedure to reinstall Make sure the tailgate is secure 2 23 Windows Leaving children helpless adults or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child a helpless adult or a pet alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather 2 24 Power Windows The controls for the power windows are located on the armrest on each of the side doors The switches operate the windows when the ignition is in RUN ACCESSORY or while Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 29 The driver s door also has a switch for each of the passenger s windows Press the top of the switch to lower the window Pull up the top of the switch to raise
96. the transfer case to NEUTRAL N See Four Wheel Drive on page 2 35 for the proper procedure to select the neutral position for your vehicle 4 58 6 Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle 7 Turn the ignition off and leave the steering column unlocked Dolly Towing Front Towing Front Wheels Off the Ground Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Notice f you tow a two wheel drive vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground the transmission could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Never tow your vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground Two wheel drive vehicles should not be towed with the rear wheels on the ground Two wheel drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed To dolly tow a two wheel drive vehicle you must tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the dolly See Rear Towing Rear Wheels Off the Ground later in this section for more information Four Wheel Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle 1 Drive the vehicle up onto the tow dolly Shift the transmission to PARK P Turn the engine off but leave the ignition on Firmly set the parking brake Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow dolly aR wR Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P You or someone else coul
97. to designate the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for low The low setting warms the seatback and cushion until the seat temperature is near body temperature The medium and high settings heat the seatback and seat cushion to a slightly higher temperature You will be able to feel heat in about two minutes To heat only the seatback press the vertical button with the heated seatback symbol An indicator light on the seatback button will glow to designate that only the seatback is being heated Additional presses of the seatback button will cycle through the heat levels for the seatback only Press the horizontal button again to heat the whole seat The heated front seats will shut off automatically when the ignition is turned off Reclining Seatbacks If you have manual reclining seatbacks the lever is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion To adjust the front seatback lift the lever Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it Lift the lever without pushing on the seatback and the seatback will go to an upright position If your vehicle has power seats with a power recliner see Power Seats on page 1 2 for further information on how to operate the reclining seatback feature But don t have a seatback reclined is moving if your vehicle Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts c
98. to hold it For example in a crash at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 Ib 5 5 kg baby will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110 kg force on a person s arms A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Q What are the different types of add on child restraints A Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used 1 33 For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition
99. to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish Notice Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may damage it Use only non abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage your vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter 5 100 Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster Washing with water is all that is usually needed However you may use chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim if necessary Use special care with aluminum trim To avoid damaging protective trim never use auto or chrome polish steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum A coating of wax rubbed to high polish is recommended for all bright metal parts Windshiel
100. transmission is in gear By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle If that does not get you out after a few tries you may need to be towed out Or you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has them If you do need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 56 Recovery Hooks Your vehicle is equipped with recovery hooks The hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle You may need to use them if you are stuck off road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving These hooks when used are under a lot of force Always pull the vehicle straight out Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle The hooks could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back Notice Never use recovery hooks to tow the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty 4 45 Loading Your Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed to carry the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification Tire label Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or eit
101. vehicle and it device on your vehicle could damage the vehicle has all the required trailering equipment The weight The repairs would not be covered by your warranty of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo Do not use a fifth wheel or goose neck hitch in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the device on your vehicle maximum trailer weight Above the 5 000 Ib 2 268 kg trailer rating the handling trailering suspension is required on C 1500 models and the handling trailering or off road suspension is required on K 1500 models 5300 V8 K 1500 4WD 5300 V8 8 000 Ibs 3 628 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers cargo equipment and conversions The GCWR for your vehicle should not be exceeded Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR K 2500 4WD 10 100 Ibs 4 581 kg 17 000 Ibs 7 711 kg 8100 V8 12 000 Ibs 5 443 kg 19 000 Ibs 8 618 kg The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers cargo equipment and conversions The GCWR for your vehicle should not be exceeded You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice or you can write us at the address listed in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet In Canada write to General Motors of Canada Limite
102. vehicle with the valve stem pointed down and toward the rear of the vehicle 2 Tilt the retainer D downward and through the wheel opening Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel A Spare Tire G Hoist Shaft Valve Stem Access Hole Pointed Down H Wheel Wrench B Hoist Assembly Jack Handle C Hoist Cable Extensions D Tire Retainer J Hoist Lock If E Hoist Shaft Equipped F Hoist End of Extension Tool 3 Attach the wheel wrench H and extensions I together 5 93 4 Insert the hoist end F through the hole G in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft 5 Raise the tire part way upward Make sure the retainer is seated in the wheel opening 6 Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice You cannot overtighten the cable 5 94 A Push and pull B turn Make sure the tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to turn the tire If the tire moves use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable Reinstall the spare tire lock if equipped To store the tools follow these steps 1 Return the tools to the tool bag and place it back in the top box storage unit 2 Assemble the wheel blocks and bottle jack together with the wing nut by reversing Step 2 under Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 79 3 Replace t
103. will inflate if the crash severity is above the system s designed threshold level The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design Side impact airbags are not designed to inflate in frontal or near frontal impacts rollovers or rear impacts because inflation would not likely help the occupant A side impact airbag will only deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck In any particular crash no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were For frontal airbags inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and near frontal impacts For side impact airbags inflation is determined by the location and severity of the impact The airbag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions including off road usage Observe safe driving speeds especially on rough terrain As always wear your safety belt See Off Road Driving with Your Four Wheel Drive Vehicle on page 4 18 for tips on off road driving What Makes an Airbag Inflate In an impact of sufficient severity the airbag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash For both frontal and side impact airbags the sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator which inflates the airbag The inflator the airbag and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules Frontal airbag
104. will not drink Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go They are the brakes the steering and the accelerator All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road Sometimes as when you are driving on snow or ice it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide That means you can lose control of your vehicle See Traction Assist System TAS on page 4 8 Braking Braking action involves perception time and reaction time First you have to decide to push on the brake pedal That is perception time Then you have to bring up your foot and do it That is reaction time Average reaction time is about three fourths of a second But that is only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in three fourths of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it is pavement or gravel the condition of the road wet dry icy tire tread the condition of your brakes the weight of the vehicle
105. you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane If the way is clear to pass you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle wait your turn But take care that someone is not trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot Check your mirrors glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane Remember that if your right outside mirror is convex the vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two lane roads Reconsider before passing the next vehicle Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly Even though the brake lamps are not flashing it may be slowing down or starting to turn If you are being passed make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you Perhaps you can ease a little to the right Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say
106. 2 41 If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 4 62 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar Compass and Temperature Display Your vehicle may have this feature When on the automatic dimming mirror dims to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark The mirror has a dual display in the upper right corner of the mirror face that shows the compass reading and the outside temperature Control buttons for the OnStar system are at the bottom of the mirror See OnStar System on page 2 54 for more information about the services OnStar provides On Off This is the on off button 2 45 Temperature and Compass Display Press the on off button located to the far left briefly to turn the compass temperature display on or off If the display reads CAL the compass needs to be calibrated For more information see Compass Calibration following To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius do the following 1 Press and hold the on off button for approximately four seconds until either a flashing F or C appears 2 Press the button again to change the display to the desired unit of measurement After approximately four seconds of inactivity the new unit will be locked in and the compass temperature display will return If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an extended period of time please see your GM dealer Under certain circumsta
107. 2005 Chevrolet Avalanche Owner Manual Cl Seats and Restraint Systems 006 1 1 Driving Your Vehicle 00cceeeeeeeeeeeees 4 1 FrOMtsS ats 2c ccaedsencetedads aedbstenacedesindideacasks 1 2 Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle _ 4 2 Rear Seals aiaeei ant N Ia E 1 7 TOWING sepen ER 4 56 T Jig See and Appearance Gare 7 Nig e FG where we ee Restraint System Check oo eee 1 63 Checking Things Under the Hood 5 12 reeues and CON rOIS sasssancsansnenessnvennvsinmrseinstes 4 Rear Axles xcicinliiudinteinciuctimtauabiniacenmiieutin 5 49 Pn A Four Wheel Drive sssini 5 50 AOM k O O aaaalall 2 24 Front AXl aeea erain a e a E rE E E ei 5 51 Theft Deterrent SysteMS eeeeceeseeeeeseeeeeeeee 2 26 Bulb Replacement nonneoeeseeesirrerrereeresesena 5 52 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 28 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement _ 5 60 MIRFOISS EE E E atten actor h tive ees 2 45 TES amir nnna E tenes acer 5 61 OnStar System sescnccuiisrsisenisis 2 54 Appearance Care oo cece ccc ec ccc ecc cence cence eens 5 95 HomeLink Transmitter cc cece cece ea ee ees 2 56 Vehicle Identification oo eee cece eeeeeee eee 5 104 Storage Areas oo eee cece cecceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 2 60 Electrical System ceecee 5 105 Sunroof Teius isseresettntetetereeeentnteeteeeeennnnsnne 2 84 Capacities and Specifications ee 5 114 Vehicle Personali
108. 4 Gasoline Engine Oxygen Sensors 5 PCM Ignition Fuses Usage Mid Bussed Electrical Center MBEC Power Feed Front Seats Right Doors BLOWER Front Climate Control Fan Left Bussed Electrical Center Door Modules Door LBEC Locks Auxiliary Power Outlet Rear Cargo Area and Instrument Panel Accessory Power Trailer STUD 2 Wiring Brake Feed Anti Lock Brakes VSES ECAS Vehicle Stability IGN A Ignition Power IGN B Ignition Power Left Bussed Electrical Center Left Doors Truck Body Controller Flasher Module TRL PARK Parking Lamps Trailer Wiring Right Rear Parking and RR PARK Sidemarker Lamps Left Rear Parking and LR PARK Sidemarker Lamps PARK LP Parking Lamps Relay STRTR Starter Relay INTPARK Interior Lamps STOP LP Stoplamps Truck Body Controller TBG BATT Battery Feed S ROOF SEO B2 Off Road Lamps Vent Solenoid 4WS Canister Quadrasteer Module Power RR HVAC Rear Climate Control Auxiliary Power AUX PWR Outlet Console IGN 1 Ignition Relay PCM 1 Powertrain Control Module Electronic Throttle Control ETC ECM Electronic Brake Controller 5 111 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Ignition Coil Fuel Daytime Running NJI Injectors Bank 1 Lamps Relay INJ 2 Ignition Coil Fuel SEO IGN Rear Defog Relay Injectors Bank 2 TBC IGN1 Truck Body Controller Ignition Instrument Panel Cluster Air HI HDLP LT High Beam Headlamp Left IGN E Conditioning Relay Turn Signal Hazard Switch LH
109. 5 e If you are still having trouble see your dealer or a qualified technician for service Remote Keyless Entry System Operation You can lock and unlock your doors from about 3 feet 1 m up to 100 feet 80 m away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle a Unlock Press this button once to unlock the driver s door The interior lamps will come on Pressing unlock again within three seconds will cause the remaining doors to unlock You can choose different feedback options for each press of the unlock button See Lock Feedback and Unlock Feedback under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 58 for more information Lock Press this button once to lock all of the doors Pressing lock again within three seconds may cause the horn to chirp for lock confirmation You can choose different feedback options for each press of the lock button See Lock Feedback and Unlock Feedback under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 58 for more information x Panic Press this button to sound the horn and flash the headlamps and taillamps for up to 30 seconds Panic can be turned off by pressing the button again by waiting for 30 seconds or by starting the vehicle Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be p
110. A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5 73 Vehicle Capacity Weight The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs 68 kg plus the rated cargo load See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire due to curb weight accessory weight occupant weight and cargo weight Vehicle Placard A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle s capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure See Tire and Loading Information Label under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 Inflation Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively Notice Do not let anyone tell you that under inflation or over inflation is all right It is not If your tires do not have enough air under inflation you can get the following Too much flexing Too much heat Tire overloading Premature or irregular wear Poor handling Reduced fuel economy If your tires have too much air over inflation you can get the following Unusual wear Poor handling Rough ride Needless damage from road hazards 5 67 A Tire and Loading Information la
111. Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle eaa n e A E EN 1 62 How Does an Airbag Restrain eeeee 1 56 Passenger Sensing System e eeeeeeeeees 1 58 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 62 What Makes an Airbag Inflate 08 1 55 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 1 56 When Should an Airbag Inflate 0 1 54 Where Are the Airbags ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 51 Antenna Fixed Mast cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 3 104 Antenna XM Satellite Radio Antenna System vesdirernevenociisin arrera 3 104 Anti Lock Brake System ABS a e 4 6 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light 3 36 Appearance Care 2 2 ceeeeee eee eee eee eee eee 5 95 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 5 101 Care of Safety Belts cceeeeeeeeee eee eees 5 99 Chemical Paint Spotting eeeeeeeeeee ees 5 102 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 000 5 99 Fabric Garpet sacverseciccevesinindsstestiantvessacetteesine 5 96 Finish GANG vi csnenniiaesameees cadet cna veestead acne voted 5 100 Finish Damage acivaseikehindeeciieesk eee 5 102 Glass Surfaces cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een eeneees 5 98 Instrument Panel eeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeee 5 98 Interior Plastic Components 0 eeeeeeee ees 5 98 leather serisinin e E 5 98 Sheet Metal Damage e eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 102 TNES a pcki
112. CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You cannot see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe And check around again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind This will help keep CO out Run your engine only as long as you must This saves fuel When you run the engine make it go a little faster than just idle That is push the accelerator slightly This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it Keeps the battery charged You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps Let the heater run for a while Then shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold But do it as little as possible Preserve the fuel as long as you can To help keep warm you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes 4 43 If You Are Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck you will need to spin the wheels but you do not want to spin your wheels too fast The method known as rocking can hel
113. Center The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership needs Specific vehicle information can be found in one place The Online Owner Center allows you to e Get e mail service reminders e Access information about your specific vehicle including tips and videos and an electronic version of this owner s manual United States only e Keep track of your vehicle s service history and maintenance schedule e Find GM dealers for service nationwide e Receive special promotions and privileges only available to members United States only Refer to the web for updated information To register your vehicle visit www MyGMLink com United States or My GM Canada within www gmcanada com Canada Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing 1 800 833 CHEV 2438 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance If a U S customer wishes to write to Chevrolet the letter should be addressed to Chevrolet s Customer Assistance Center United States Customer Assistance Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33170 Detroit MI 48232 5170 1
114. Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement Notice The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 78 for more information Used Replacement Wheels Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You can t know how it s been used or how far it s been driven It could fail suddenly and cause a crash If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel 5 75 Tire Chains If your vehicle is a 1500 Series don t use tire chains They can damage your vehicle because there s not enough clearance Tire chains used on a vehicle withou
115. Engine oil which meets GM Automatic Transmission Fluid Look for Standard GM6094M and displays Transmission Approved for the H Specification the American Petroleum Institute on the label Certified for Gasoline Engines z Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube starburst symbol GM Key Lock Engine Oil Goodwrench oil meets all the Cylinders GM Part No U S 12346241 in requirements for your vehicle To Canada 10953474 determine the proper viscosity for Chassis Lubricant your vehicle s engine see Engine Chassis GM Part No U S 12377985 in Oil on page 5 17 Lubrication Sal 88901242 z eas 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable cae Ing her OCIB Engine Coolant Water and use only ategory Lb or UU LB 9 DEX COOL Coolant See Engine Coolant on page 5 28 Usage Fluid Lubricant Usage Fluid Lubricant SAE 80W 90 Axle Lubricant Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Front Axle GM Part No U S 1052271 in Hood Hinges GM Part No U S 12346241 in Canada 10950849 Canada 10953474 SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Outer Tailgate Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Lubricant GM Part Handle Pivot GM Part No U S 12346241 in Rear Axle No U S 12378261 in Points Canada 10953474 Canada 10953455 meeting Dielectric Sili GM Specification 9986115 Weatherstrip Gir Pan No US 12345679 in Conditioning Canada 992887 Gm bar Ne si M Part No U S 12378508 in Transfer Case Synthetic Grease with
116. G X DO NOT INSTALL A REAR FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN THIS SEATING POSITION e DO NOT INSTALL A FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN THIS SEATING POSITION DOOR LOCK UNLOCK ENGINE COOLANT MASTER s 7 LIGHTING SWITCH s TEMP 7i gee le A PS BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM PARKING LAMPS HAZARD WARNING FLASHER ENGINE OIL PRESSURE ANTI LOCK BRAKES 7 S FUSE BOX ACCESS ENGINE COOLANT OWNER S MANUAL SERVICE MANUAL 4 NOTES vi Section 1 Front Seats ceccc cccccceececeseen ee ceeeedeeeeneecnedeeeenes 1 2 Manual Passenger Seat ccceeeeeeneeeeeeeee es 1 2 Power Seats ceci ienen aaa EEEE 1 2 Power Lumbar secen an aE ESERE 1 3 Heated Seats siisicissieisesieersielcielevteeiions 1 4 Reclining Seatbacks cceceeeeeeeeeneeeeen eee eenes 1 5 Head Restraints seisean neen 1 7 Rear Se ats pner pna 1 7 Rear Seat Operation eee 1 7 Safety Belts kanoan n a ntaceaaes 1 9 Safety Belts They Are for Everyone 5 1 9 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts 1 13 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 14 Driver POSIHIOM i2 seciss ican lsenadeg be wseneerteseanneiies 1 14 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 0 1 21 Right Front Passenger Position 00 1 22 Center Front Passenger Position 08 1 22 Rear Seat Passengers 1 23 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
117. GED Low Speed For steady wiping at low speed turn the band away from you to the first solid band past the delay settings BS High Speed For high speed wiping turn the band further to the second solid band past the delay settings O Off To stop the wipers move the band to off Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If they re frozen to the windshield carefully loosen or thaw them If your blades do become worn or damaged get new blades or blade inserts Windshield Washer W Washer Fluid There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction lever To spray washer fluid on the windshield push the paddle The wipers will clear the window and then either stop or return to your preset speed In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision Cruise Control Off This position turns the system off On This position activates the system Resume Accelerate Push the lever to this symbol to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed Y Set Press this button to set the speed Setting Cruise Control With cruise control you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator This can really help on long trips Cruise control does not work at speed
118. HAINS cense iar ra ira EEAS 5 76 ES sra E E E 5 102 If a Tire Goes Flat asnirniuesiociier ienesa 5 77 Sheet Metal Damage ceeeeeeeeeee eee ees 5 102 Changing a Flat Tire 0 ccceeeeeeeeee eee eee eee 5 78 FINISH Damage saamia aan oaas 5 102 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 5 79 Underbody Maintenance seeeeeee sees 5 102 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Chemical Paint Spotting eeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 102 Spare Tire ccc eeeeceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 5 82 Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 5 103 Secondary Latch System see eee 5 89 Vehicle Identification 0 0 ccceeeee 5 104 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 5 92 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 5 104 Spare Tire cece eee ceeeeceeaeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 95 Service Parts Identification Label 5 104 Appearance Care seenen 5 95 Electrical System 0 00cccccsseseeseseeseeseeees 5 105 Fabric Carpet AAEE EEEE E E E E 5 96 Windshield Wiper FUSES 0c00cc0cseeeeeees 5 105 MIMY I E cha hate E seit 5 98 Power Windows and Other Power Options 5 105 Leather soreer diina aa e aR 5 98 Fuses and Circuit BreakersS oll aaau 5 105 Instrument Panel seesseseeeseeeeerreerrernererseee 5 98 Instrument Panel Fuse BIOCK laan 5 106 Interior Plastic Components 6 eeeeeeeeees 5 98 Center Instru
119. It is the amount of alcohol that counts For example if the same person drank three double martinis 3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each within an hour the person s BAC would be close to 0 12 percent A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level There is a gender difference too Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men Since alcohol is carried in body water this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight will when each has the same number of drinks The law in most U S states and throughout Canada sets the legal limit at 0 08 percent In some other countries the limit is even lower For example it is 0 05 percent in both France and Germany The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0 04 percent The BAC will be over 0 10 percent after three to six drinks in one hour Of course as we have seen it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks and how quickly the person drinks them But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0 10 percent Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0 05 percent and that the effects are worse at night All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0 05 percent Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0 05 percent or
120. LOAD button to cancel the loading function The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded If more than one CD has been loaded a number for each CD will appear on the display Playing a Specific Loaded CD For every CD loaded a number will appear on the display To play a specific CD first press the CD AUX button then press the numbered pushbutton that corresponds to the CD A small bar will appear under the CD number that is playing and the track number will appear on the display If an error appears on the display see CD Messages later in this section cD A Eject Press this button to eject CD s To eject the CD that is currently playing press and release this button To eject multiple CDs do the following 1 Press and hold the CD eject button for five seconds You will hear a beep and the indicator light located to the right of the slot will begin to flash and EJECT ALL will appear on the display 2 Once the light stops flashing and turns green REMOVE CD will appear on the display The CD will eject and can be removed Once the CD is removed the indicator light will begin flashing again and another CD will eject To stop ejecting the CDs press the LOAD or the eject button If the CD is not removed after 25 seconds the CD will be automatically pulled back into the player If CD is pushed back into the player before the 25 second time period is complete the player will sense an error and will
121. LS eia a d aae iai 2 22 TAINAN PS ienesa aana E EA 5 59 Theft Deterrent Radio ccccceceeeeeeeeeee ees 3 102 Theft Deterrent Systems ceceeeeeeeeee tenes 2 26 Content Theft Deterrent cceeeeeeeeeee 2 26 PasslocK ee innorat ena 2 27 Throttle Adjustable ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 2 30 Tilt Whea saccecnusigereeandesces centtcen annar ii 3 7 12 Mires serra E tee 5 61 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels ClOaning siiietencetieris iiie naene 5 101 Buying New Tire siicsssarisocsss misanna 5 72 CHAINS ea a Ea a E mens 5 76 Changing a Flat Tire sesicerricnerinoanraiensi es 5 78 Gleanings ai aai 5 102 Ifa Tire Goes Flat vicccsveas sendin 5 77 Inflation Tire Pressure accses 5 67 Inspection and Rotation eeeeeee eee 5 70 Installing the Spare Tire ececeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 82 Removing the Flat Tire 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeee es 5 82 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 5 79 Secondary Latch System ceeeeeeee eee e ee 5 89 Spare Tire iccdscstdencanonconmesconcomensntie Ea 5 95 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 5 92 Tire Sidewall Labelling ceseeeeeeeeeee ees 5 62 Tire Terminology and Definitions 5 65 Uniform Tire Quality Grading eee 5 73 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 5 74 Wheel Replacement 0 cseeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 74 When It
122. Lamps DRL Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The DRL system will come on when the following conditions are met e The ignition is on e the exterior lamps control is in AUTO e the transmission is not in PARK P and e the light sensor determines it is daytime When the DRL are on only your DRL lamps will be on The taillamps sidemarker and other lamps won t be on The instrument panel won t be lit up either When it begins to get dark the automatic headlamp system will switch from DRL to the headlamps As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside and the headlamp switch is in AUTO your automatic headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the normal brightness along with other lamps such as the taillamps sidemarker parking lamps roof marker lamps and the instrument panel lights The radio lights will also be dim To turn off the automatic headlamp system turn the exterior lamps switch to the off position and then release Turning off the automatic headlamp system with the headlamp switch is not available for veh
123. M s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C Dual Tire Maximum Load Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used in a dual configuration For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 67 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 D DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards E Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture F Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread G Single Tire Maximum Load Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used as a single For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 67 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 5 63 Tire Size The following examples show the different parts of a tire size P245 75R16 109S T A B CDE
124. Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 5 52 Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs see Replacement Bulbs on page 5 60 For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your dealer Halogen Bulbs Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package Headlamps Vehicles with Body Side Cladding 1 Remove the turn signal parking lamp housing by pressing the release clip on the outboard side of the housing and pulling the outboard end of the housing toward you 2 Pull the inboard side of the housing out from the vehicle 3 Pull the pins away from their clips and pull them up until they completely release from the vehicle 4 Pull the headlamp assembly out of the vehicle Vehicles without Body Side Cladding A Low Beam Headlamp B High Beam Headlamp 5 Turn the bulb connector counterclockwise and pull it out of the housing 6 Unplug the electrical connector from the old bulb 7 Plug in the electrical connector to the new bulb Use care not to touch the new bulb with your bare hands or anything damp or oily 8 Place the connector with the new bulb into the i fe ape pin on the e aero by headlamp housing and turn it clockwise until it is turning the pi
125. NE will appear on the display Press RDM again to turn off random play e To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded in random order press and hold RDM for more than two seconds You will hear a beep and RANDOM ALL will appear on the display Press RDM again to turn off random play AUTO EQ Automatic Equalization Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization setting while playing a CD The equalization will be stored whenever a CD is played For more information on AUTO EQ see AUTO EQ listed previously in this section 3 86 Ki SEEK Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than ten seconds have played Press the right arrow to go to the next track If either arrow is held or pressed more than once the player will continue moving backward or forward through the CD K1 SCAN To scan one CD press and hold either SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until TRACK SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep The radio will go to the next track play for 10 seconds then go on to the next track Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning To scan all loaded CDs press and hold either SCAN arrow for more than four seconds until ALL CD SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track of each loaded CD Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning INFO Information Press this knob to see how long the current t
126. ORN Electric Adjustable Pedals TREC All Wheel Drive Module Supplemental Brake Assist Lift the cover for access to the fuse relay block COOL FAN Cooling Fan COOL FAN Cooling Fan Relay Fuse COOL FAN Cooling Fan Fuse C Relays Usage SSCS 5 113 Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 for more information Application Air Conditioning Refrigerant R 134a _16lbs ie __ a7 kg Engine Cooling System VORTEC 5300 V8 Automatic with Front A C Engine Fan Driven Cooling System 16 0 quarts 14 5L VORTEC 5300 V8 Automatic with Front A C Electric Cooling Fan System 17 0 quarts 16 0L VORTEC 8100 V8 Automatic Engine Fan Driven Cooling System 27 0 quarts 25 5L Engine Oil with Filter 5300 V8 6 0 quarts 5 7L 8100 V8 6 5 quarts 6 1L Fuel Tank Capacity 1500 31 0 gallons 117 0L 2500 37 5 gallons 142 0L Wheel Nut Torque 140 ft Ib 190 Nem All capacities are approximate When adding be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this manual Recheck fluid level after filling 5 114 Engine Specifications Engine e VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap VORTEC 5300 V8 0 040 inches 1 01 mm Or mm VORTEC 5300 V8 0 040 inches LOT mm VORTEG 6100 V8 0 060 inches 1 52 mm 5 115 4 NOTES 5 116 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedu
127. Passenger P Metric Tire LT245 75R16 E120 116S an Light Truck LT Metric Tire DE A Passenger P Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association 5 64 A Light Truck LT Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letters LT as the first two characters in the tire size means a light truck tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall C Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 75 as shown in item C of the light truck LT Metric tire illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 75 as high as it is wide D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply construction E Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches F Service Description The service description indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire The load index can range from 1 to 279 Speed ratings range from A to Z
128. Passing another vehicle on a two lane highway is a potentially dangerous move since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds A miscalculation an error in judgment or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents the head on collision So here are some tips for passing e Drive ahead Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass wait for a better time e Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection delay your pass A broken center line usually indicates it is all right to pass providing the road ahead is clear Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity For one thing following too closely reduces your area of vision especially if you are following a larger vehicle Also you will not have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops Keep back a reasonable distance When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do not get too close Time your move so
129. RAL N This is called free wheeling Your brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade Q Am likely to stall when going downhill It is much more likely to happen going uphill But if it happens going downhill here is what to do 1 Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes Apply the parking brake 2 Shift to PARK P and while still braking restart the engine 3 Shift back to a low gear release the parking brake and drive straight down 4 If the engine will not start get out and get help Driving Across an Incline Sooner or later an off road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill If this happens you have to decide whether to try to drive across the incline Here are some things to consider e A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive across When you go straight up or down a hill the length of the wheel base the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end But when you drive across an incline the much more narrow track width the distance between the left and right wheels may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over Also driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover e Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive across a hill Loose gravel muddy spots or eve
130. Safety Belt Extender on page 1 28 Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to Rear Seat Passengers It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts 1 23 Lap Shoulder Belt Make sure the release button on the buckle is is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the All rear seating positions have lap shoulder belts Here safety belt quickly if you ever had to is how to wear a lap shoulder belt properly 3 To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part 1 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let it get twisted 2 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way it will lock If it does let it go back all the way and start again If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 1 28 1 24 You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too muc
131. Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire 5 66 Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure and shown on the tire placard See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 67 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate Traction The friction between the tire and the road surface The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm of tread remains See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 71 UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
132. T LEVEL message and it comes on and stays on it means you are low on engine coolant See LOW COOLANT LEVEL under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 Adding Coolant If you need more coolant add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the surge tank but only when the engine is cool You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine When replacing the pressure cap make sure it is hand tight 5 29 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully installed on the coolant surge tank See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for more information on location Notice If the pressure cap is not tightly installed coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle s instrument panel See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 37 In addition you will find an ENGINE COOLANT HOT ENGINE OVERHEATED and a REDUCED ENGINE POWER message in the Driver Information Center DIC on the instrument panel See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 5 30 If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
133. TS appears in the display To select your preference for perimeter lighting press the select button while PERIMETER LIGHTS is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices PERIMETER LIGHTS ON default The headlamps and back up lamps will come on for 40 seconds if it is dark enough outside when you unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter PERIMETER LIGHTS OFF The perimeter lights will not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter Choose one of the available options and press the customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature Easy Exit Seat Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT appears in the display To select your preference for seat position exit press the select button while EASY EXIT SEAT is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices EASY EXIT SEAT OFF default No seat exit recall will occur 3 61 EASY EXIT SEAT ON The drivers seat will move to the exit position when the key is removed from the ignition Choose one of the available options and press the customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature For more information on seat position exit see Memory Seat on page 2 85 Curb View Press the customization button until CURB VIEW appe
134. Take the vehicle to your GM dealer for service If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your GM dealer XM Radio Messages Radio Display ses XL Explicit Language XL on the radio display These channels or any others can be blocked at a Channels after the channel name customer s request by calling 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 indicates content with explicit language Updating Updating The encryption code in the receiver is being updated and encryption code no action is required This process should take no longer than 30 seconds No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly but the vehicle is ina location that is blocking the XM signal When you move into an open area the signal should return Loading XM Acquiring channel audio The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and after 4 second delay text data No action is needed This message should disappear shortly CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service Tune to another channel CH Unavail Channel no longer This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned available Tune to another station If this station was one of the presets choose another station for that preset button No Info Artist Name Feature No artist information is available at this time on this channel not available The system is working properly No Info Song Program Title No song title information is ava
135. The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty depth of color gloss retention and durability The best way to preserve the vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun Use a car washing soap Do not use strong soaps or chemical detergents Be sure to rinse the vehicle well removing all soap residue completely GM approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer See Vehicle Care Appearance Materials on page 5 103 Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface or they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 99 5 99 Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Vehicle Care Appearance Materials on page 5 103 If your vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss
136. Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 56 Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident If the light is still on after you have pulled off the road and stopped carefully have the vehicle towed for service 3 35 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light With the anti lock brake system this light will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for several seconds That s normal If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem If the light stays on or comes on when you re driving your vehicle needs service You will also hear a chime sound when the light is on steady If the regular brake system warning light isn t on you still have brakes but you don t have anti lock brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on you don t have anti lock brakes and there s a problem with your regular brakes In addition to both lights you will also hear a chime sound on the first occurrence of a problem and each time the vehicle is shut off and then restarted See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 35 3 36 Traction Off Light If you have the Traction Assist System or the StabiliTrak system this light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition to RUN If the light doesn t come on then the system may require service
137. With four wheel drive if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 4 62 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake Move the shift lever into the PARK P position by pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it will go Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL N 4 Turn the ignition key to LOCK Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand your vehicle is in PARK P 2 41 Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set If you have four wheel drive and your transfer case is in NEUTRAL your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Do not leave your vehicle with the engine running unless you have to 2 42 If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running be sure y
138. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter The alarm won t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way Testing the Alarm The alarm can be tested by following these steps 1 From inside the vehicle lower the driver s window and open the driver s door 2 Activate the system by locking the doors with the power door lock switch while the door is open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter 3 Get out of the vehicle close the door and wait for the security light to go out 4 Then reach in through the window unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door This should set off the alarm While the alarm is set the power door unlock switch is not operational If the alarm does not sound when it should but the headlamps flash check to see if the horn works The horn fuse may be blown To replace the fuse see Instrument Panel Fuse Block on page 5 106 and Underhood Fuse Block on page 5 109 If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not flash the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer Passlock Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock theft deterrent system Passlock is a passive theft deterrent system Passlock enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a valid key If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock cylinder is tampered with the fuel system is disabled and the vehicle will not start During normal
139. a cool dry place Recommended Action No power The ignition might not be in on or accessory The parental control button might have been turned on The power indicator light will flash The system might be off The parental control button might have been turned on The power indicator light will flash The system might be in auxiliary mode The disc is upside down or is not compatible Disc will not play Recommended Action Check the display mode settings in the display menu The picture does not fill the screen There are black borders on the top and bottom or on both sides or it looks stretched out The disc was ejected but it was pulled back into the DVD player In auxiliary mode the picture moves or scrolls The language in the audio or on the screen is wrong The disc is being stored in the DVD player Press the eject button again to eject the disc Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices Change the Video Format to PAL or NTSC See Stereo RCA Jacks previously for how to change the video format Check the audio or language selection in the main DVD menu 3 97 Recommended Action The remote control does not work After stopping the player push Play but sometimes the DVD starts where left off and sometimes at the beginning 3 98 Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the remote control and the transmitter window Check the
140. about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency do not give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid your wheels are not rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If you have the Traction Assist System remember It helps avoid only the acceleration skid If you do not have this system or if the system is off then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If your vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough your vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction
141. above 8 mph 13 km h for three seconds Choose one of the available options and press the customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature For more information on automatic door locks see Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2 10 Unlock Doors Press the customization button until UNLOCK DOORS appears in the display To select your preference for automatic unlocking press the select button while UNLOCK DOORS is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices UNLOCK DOORS IN PARK default All of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK P UNLOCK DRIVER IN PARK The driver s door will be unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK P UNLOCK DOORS KEY OUT All of the doors will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition UNLOCK DOORS MANUALLY The doors will not be unlocked automatically Choose one of the available options and press the customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature For more information on automatic door locks see Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2 10 Door Lock Delay If your DIC does not have this feature you can still program the delayed locking feature See Delayed Locking on page 2 9 for more information When locking the doors with the power lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter and a doo
142. ack in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place Consistency of Readings Always check the fluid level at least twice using the procedure described previously Consistency repeatable readings is important to maintaining proper fluid level If inconsistent readings persist check the transmission breather hose to be sure it is clean and unclogged If readings are still inconsistent contact your dealer How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot A cold check is used only as a reference If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check It does not take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5 L Do not overfill Notice Use of automatic transmission fluid labeled other than DEXRON III Approved for the H Specification may damage your vehicle and the damages may not be covered by your warranty Always use automatic transmission fluid labeled DEXRON III Approved for the H Specification e After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as described under How to Check earlier in this section e When the correct fluid level is obtained push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 5 27 En
143. ad e Does the travel take you uphill or downhill There is more discussion of these subjects later e Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain keep a firm grip on the steering wheel Ruts troughs or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if you are not prepared When you drive over bumps rocks or other obstacles your wheels can leave the ground If this happens even with one or two wheels you cannot control the vehicle as well or at all Because you will be on an unpaved surface it is especially important to avoid sudden acceleration sudden turns or sudden braking In a way off road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways There are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what is not Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road And this is certainly true for off road driving At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills your reflexes perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You could have a serious or even fatal accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking See Drunken Driving on page 4 2 4 21 Driving on Off Road Hills Off road driving often takes you up down or across a hill Driving safely on hil
144. all occupants and cargo inside the cab should not exceed 300 Ib 135 kg This means that you may only be able to carry one passenger But even this may be too much if you have got other equipment already adding to the weight of your vehicle Here are some guidelines for safely carrying a snow plow on your vehicle Make sure the weight on the front and rear axles does not exceed the axle rating for each For the front axle if more cargo or passengers must be carried appropriate counter ballast must be installed rear of the rear axle Counter ballast must be properly secured so it will not move during driving Follow the snow plow manufacturer s recommendations regarding rear ballast Rear ballast may be required to ensure a proper front and rear weight distribution ratio even though the actual weight at the front axle may be less than the front axle rating The snow plow manufacturer or installer can assist you in determining the amount of rear ballast required to help make sure your snowplow vehicle combination does not exceed the GVW rating the front and rear axle ratings and the front and rear weight distribution ratio The total vehicle must not exceed the GVW rating Q What is front axle reserve capacity and how do calculate it Front axle reserve capacity is the difference between your front GAWR and the front axle weight of your truck with full fuel and passengers Basically it is the amount of w
145. ally disengage When road conditions allow you to use cruise again you may re engage the cruise control See Cruise Control on page 3 10 StabiliTrak may also turn off automatically if it determines that a problem exists with the system If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle you should see your dealer for service Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning you can steer but it will take much more effort Steering Tips Driving on Curves It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed A lot of the driver lost control accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves Here is why Experienced driver or beginner each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels If there is no traction inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice you will understand this The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and your speed While you are in a curve speed is the one factor you can control Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve Then you suddenly accelerate Both control systems steering and acce
146. am this feature using the Driver Information Center DIC See Door Lock Delay under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 58 Programmable Automatic Door Locks Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock unlock feature which enables you to program your vehicle s power door locks You can program this feature through the Driver Information Center DIC or by the following method See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 58 for more information on DIC programming Programmable Locking Feature The following two modes are available programming options Mode 1 All doors lock when the transmission is shifted out of PARK P Mode 2 All doors lock when the vehicle speed is greater than 8 mph 13 km h The following instructions tell you how to change the automatic door lock mode Choose one of the two programming options listed above before entering the program mode To enter the program mode do the following 1 Begin with the ignition off Then pull the turn signal multifunction lever toward you and hold it there while you perform the next step 2 Turn the key to RUN then back to LOCK twice Then with the key in LOCK release the turn signal multifunction lever Once you do this the doors will lock and unlock the horn will chirp twice and a 30 second timer will begin You are now ready to program the automatic door lock feature 3 Press the lock side of the power lock switch once You will hear either one o
147. amps DRL 11 5 58 Engine Air Cleaner Filter o on 5 22 TallampS moerassen eae AA 5 59 Automatic Transmission Fluid 5 25 Replacement Bulbs c seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 60 Engine COOMA cccscisc Scud checurwneactneseomctadedanuntes 5 28 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 5 60 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap 0 0 5 30 T FES cee cea lade teeta ence restated 5 61 Engine Overheating ccceeeeeeeseereees 5 30 Tire Sidewall Labelling cccccccceeeeeeee 5 62 Overheated Engine Protection Tire Terminology and Definitions 5 65 Operating Mode cseeeteeeeeeeeeteereeees 5 32 Inflation Tire Pressure ccceesssseeeeeeeeeees 5 67 Cooling System Se eee ee eee errr 5 32 Tire Inspection and Rotation cccccccccccccccccueee 5 70 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care When It Is Time for New Tires accen 5 71 Washing Your Vehicle ceeeeeeeeeeee eee eees 5 99 Buying New Tires ccseeeneeeeeeeeeeerereeeees 5 72 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 0 00 5 99 Uniform Tire Quality Grading eeeeeeeeeees 5 73 FINISH Care se merek nannten E E ETES 5 100 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 5 74 Windshield and Wiper Blades 05 5 100 Wheel Replacement ceeceeeeeeeeeeererees 5 74 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 5 101 Tine C
148. an embankment a drop off a fence Get out and walk the hill if you do not know It is the smart way to find out e Is the hill simply too rough Steep hills often have ruts gullies troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion Driving Uphill e Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of the hill Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill you need to take some special steps e Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more isi i i il hills Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills steering wheel e Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill PE i ffic k here e Geta smooth start up the hill and try to maintain to set opposing traiic xnow you are there your speed Do not use more power than you e Use your headlamps even during the day They need because you do not want your wheels to start make you more visible to oncoming traffic spinning or sliding e Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible If the path twists and turns you might want to find another route Driving to the top crest of a hill at full speed can cause an accident There could be a drop off embankment cliff or even another vehicle You could be seriously injured or killed As you near the top of a hill slow down and stay alert Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous You could lose traction slide sid
149. an not do their job when you are reclined like this The shoulder belt can not do its job Ina crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt can not do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly Head Restraints Rear Seats Rear Seat Operation The rear seat is a 60 40 split rear seat that can be folded to give you more cargo space and access to the folding midgate See Midgate on page 2 13 for more information on operation of the folding midgate To fold either side of the seat do the following 1 Push the rear head restraints all the way down 2 Pull the seat loop located where the seatback and seat cushion meet The seat cushion will release and allow you to tilt it toward the front of the vehicle Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash The rear seat head restraints in your vehicle are adjustable They work the same as the front seat head restraints If the seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always p
150. and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If your engine ever stops while you are driving brake normally but do not pump your brakes If you do the pedal may get harder to push down If your engine stops you will still have some power brake assist But you will use it when you brake Once the power assist is used up it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Anti Lock Brake System ABS Your vehicle has anti lock brakes ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid When you start your engine and begin to drive away your anti lock brake system will check itself You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on This is normal If there is a problem with the anti lock brake system this warning light will stay on See Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 3 36 Along with ABS your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear Proportioning DRP system If there is a DRP probl
151. anel Pull off the cover to access the fuse block To remove fuses if you don t have a fuse extractor hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out You may have spare fuses located behind the fuse block access door These can be used to replace a bad fuse However make sure it is of the correct amperage 5 106 RET Cens Cw Camac j ma we a si prance lez bral da Cees C IGN O VEH STOP DDM ECC CB LT DOORS RR Wiper Rear Window Wiper Switch Special Equipment Option WS WPR Windshield Wipers Truck Body Controller IGN 3 Ignition Heated Seats Four Wheel Drive System HTR A C Climate Control System LT TRN Left Turn Signals LOCK Power Door Lock Relay and Sidemarkers Lock Function Vehicle Stoplamps Brake Inside Rearview Mirror VEH STOP Module Electronic Throttle HVAC 1 Climate Control System Control Module io Driver s Door Harness Connection RT TRLR ST TRN Right Turn Signal Stop Trailer CRUISE Cruise Control RT TRN Right Turn Signals UNLOCK Power Door Lock Relay and Sidemarkers Unlock Function IDDM Driver Door Module RR FOG LP Rear Fog Lamp Export Only AUX PWR 2 Rear Cargo Area BRAKE Anti Lock Brake System Power Outlets Power Door Lock Relay LOCKS Power Door Lock System DRIVER UNLOCK Driver s Door Unlock ECC Rear Electronic Climate Function Cont
152. anning To scan preset stations press and hold either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds PSC will appear on the display and you will hear a double beep The radio will go to a preset station play for a few seconds then go on to the next preset station Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows again to stop scanning presets The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band 3 77 Setting Preset Stations Up to 30 stations six FM1 six FM2 and six AM six XM1 and six XM2 if equipped can be programed on the six numbered pushbuttons by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press BAND to select FM1 FM2 AM or XM1 or XM2 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever that numbered pushbutton is pressed the station that was set will return for that pushbutton 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton To store an equalization setting to a preset station perform the following 1 Tune to the preset station 2 Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select the equalization setting Once the equalization no longer appears on the display the equalization will be set for that preset station 3 78 Setting the Tone Bass Treble AUDIO Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS MID without Bose or TREB appears on the display Turn the knob to increase or t
153. ant to flush them out with clean water if you notice any debris collecting inside of them When loading cargo into the cargo area be careful not to damage the rails 2 75 Midgate Drain Grate Removal and Cleaning The midgate drain grate is located near the base of the midgate in the cargo area You will find a removable drain grate covering the drain 2 76 After hauling dirt wood chips pebbles etc you will need to flush the midgate drain with water But first you will have to remove the drain grate by using the following steps 1 Lower the midgate See Midgate on page 2 13 for more information 2 Pull up on the rear side of the drain grate 3 Tilt the drain grate away from you and pull it straight out Reverse the procedure to reinstall the drain grate Cargo Area Floor Drains Your vehicle also has four cargo area floor drains located under the cargo mat near the sides of the cargo area These drains should be cleaned periodically to allow water to exit the cargo area The cargo mat has cutouts for the drains You can flush the drains through the cutouts but if the cargo area is extremely dirty you can lift up the edges of the cargo floor mat or take the whole mat out and flush the drains with water Top Box Storage Your vehicle is equipped with top box storage units on both side of the vehicle The passenger side top box contains the tools you will need to change a flat tire Use the
154. ars in the display To select your preference for curb view press the select button while CURB VIEW is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices CURB VIEW OFF default Neither outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R CURB VIEW PASSENGER The passenger s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R CURB VIEW DRIVER The driver s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R 3 62 CURB VIEW BOTH The driver s and passenger s outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R Choose one of the available options and press the customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature For more information on tilt mirror in reverse see Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb View Assist on page 2 53 Alarm Warning Press the customization button until ALARM WARNING appears in the display To select your preference for alarm warning press the select button while ALARM WARNING is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices ALARM WARNING BOTH default The headlamps will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is active ALARM WARNING OFF There will be no alarm warning on activation ALARM WARNING HORN The horn will chirp when
155. ass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature Display Your vehicle may be equipped with this feature When on an automatic dimming mirror will dim to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark 2 48 The mirror also includes a dual display in the upper right corner of the mirror with the compass reading and the outside temperature The display can be turned on or off by briefly pressing either the TEMP or the COMP button Temperature Display The temperature can be displayed by pressing the TEMP button Pressing the TEMP button once briefly will toggle the temperature reading on and off To alternate the temperature reading between Fahrenheit and Celsius press and hold the TEMP button for approximately four seconds until the display blinks F and C Press and release the TEMP button to toggle between the Fahrenheit and Celsius readings After approximately four seconds of inactivity the display will stop blinking and display the last selection made Press and release the TEMP button to toggle the temperature display between Fahrenheit or Celsius If an abnormal reading is displayed please consult your GM dealer Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation Press and hold the TEMP button for approximately eight seconds to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off The indicator light to
156. aster until you release the switch or apply the brake So unless you want to go faster do not hold the switch at resume accelerate Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed e Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed Press the set button at the end of the lever then release the button and the accelerator pedal You will now cruise at the higher speed If the accelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds cruise control will turn off e Move the cruise switch from on to resume accelerate Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want and then release the switch To increase your speed in very small amounts move the switch briefly to resume accelerate Each time you do this your vehicle will go about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control e Press in the button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want then release it e To slow down in very small amounts briefly press the set button Each time you do this you will go about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed When you take your foot off the pedal your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed load and the steepness of the hills When
157. attery from draining while towing Level Control Self Adjusting The self adjusting rear suspension may come as part of the premium smooth ride suspension package This type of level control will provide a leveled riding position as well as improved handling under a variety of passenger and loading conditions A hydraulic pump inside each rear shock absorber raises the rear of the vehicle to the proper height based on inputs from the road surface while the vehicle is being driven It take approximately 2 miles 3 2 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on the road surface conditions If the loaded vehicle is not moved for approximately 12 hours the leveling system may bleed down to a lower height This can be especially apparent if a trailer is left attached to a parked vehicle for long periods of time The vehicle must be driven to re level the vehicle If a self equalizing hitch is being used the vehicle should be driven approximately 2 miles 3 2 km with the trailer prior to adjusting leveling the hitch Truck Camper Loading Information Your vehicle was neither designed nor intended to carry a slide in type camper Notice Adding a slide in camper or similar equipment to your vehicle can damage it and the repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not install a slide in camper or similar equipment on your vehicle Trailer Recommendations You must subtract your hitch loads from the Car
158. ature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings e Donottow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer on page 4 62 for more information 2 28 Ignition Positions Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four different positions A Lock This position locks the ignition and transmission It is a theft deterrent feature You will only be able to remove the key when the ignition is turned to LOCK Notice Using a tool to force the key from the ignition switch could cause damage or break the key Use the correct key and turn the key only with your hand Make sure the key is in all the way If none of this works then your vehicle needs service B Accessory This position lets you use things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine is off Notice Lengthy operation of features such as the radio in the accessory ignition position may drain the battery and prevent your vehicle from starting Do not operate your vehicle in the accessory ignition position for a long period of time C Run This is the position for driving D Start This position starts the engine Retained Accessory Power RAP The Retained Accessory Power RAP feature will allow certain features on your vehicle to continue to work for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to LOCK or until one of the doors is opened Starting Your Engine Your vehicle i
159. auxiliary transmission oil cooler if equipped A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures on a frequent basis see Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for the proper transmission maintenance intervals Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems This system is called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment The check engine light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction Notice If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on after awhile your emission controls may not work as well your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty Notice Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
160. ay When the transmission enters the protection mode you may notice a change in the transmission shifting patterns When the transmission fluid temperature returns to normal the display will turn off and the transmission shifting patterns will return to normal Notice lf you drive your vehicle while the transmission fluid is overheating and the transmission temperature warning is displayed on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC you can damage the transmission This could lead to costly repairs that would not be covered by your warranty Do not drive your vehicle with overheated transmission fluid or while transmission temperature warning is displayed The following situations can cause the transmission to operate at higher temperatures e Towing a trailer e Hot outside air temperatures e Hauling a large or heavy load e Over loading e Low transmission fluid level e High transmission fluid level e Restricted air flow to the radiator A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures on a frequent basis see Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for the proper transmission maintenance intervals 3 57 TURN SIGNAL ON If a turn signal is left on for 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km this message will appear on the display and you will hear a chime Move the turn signal multifunction lever to the off position Pressin
161. ay have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If this message is received after having your vehicle serviced check with your GM dealer Radio ID Radio ID label If tuned to channel 0 this message will alternate with the channel 0 XM Radio eight digit radio ID label This label is needed to activate the service Unknown Radio ID not known If this message is received when tuned to channel 0 there should only be if may be a receiver fault Consult with your GM dealer hardware failure Chk XMRevr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time your receiver may have a fault Consult with your GM dealer 3 83 Playing a CD If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it will stay in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD will start playing where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source When a CD is inserted the CD symbol will appear on the display As each new track starts to play the track number will appear on the display The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner If playing a CD R the sound quality may be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled There may be an in
162. ay want to consider not using seat covers or other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger sensing system See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 62 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates A CAUTION os A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light in the instrument panel cluster ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the Stowing of articles under the passenger s seat airbag system If this ever happens have the or between the passenger s seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper CAUTION Continued operation of the passenger sensing system 1 61 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced There are airbag system parts in several places around your vehicle You do not want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system To purchase a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 11 For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected an airbag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors They are probably part of the airbag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and
163. battery 4 Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle 5 Return the positive remote terminal cover if equipped to its original position Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an Jumper Cable Removal unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative Terminal B Good Battery or Remote Positive and Remote Negative Terminals C Dead Battery or Remote Positive Terminal 5 49 How to Check Lubricant 1500 Series shown 2500 Series similar To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be ona level surface The proper level for the 1500 Series is from 5 8 inch to 1 5 8 inch 15 mm to 40 mm below the bottom of the filler plug hole The proper level for the 2500 Series is from O to 1 2 inch 0 to 13 mm below the bottom of the filler plug hole Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level 5 50 What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Four Wheel Drive Transfer Case It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired Refer to the
164. be sure all filler caps are on properly Pull down the hood and close it firmly 5 13 Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood on the VORTEC 5300 V8 engine here is what you will see Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 22 Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap See Cooling System on page 5 32 and Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5 30 Air Filter Restriction Indicator If Equipped See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 22 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 17 Engine Oil Dipstick See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 17 Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick See Checking the Fluid Level under Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5 25 Electric Engine Cooling Fan If Equipped See Cooling System on page 5 32 Remote Negative Terminal GND See Jump Starting on page 5 45 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Out of View See Power Steering Fluid on page 5 38 Remote Positive Terminal See Jump Starting on page 5 45 Brake Fluid Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 5 41 Underhood Fuse Block See Underhood Fuse Block on page 5 109 Battery See Battery on page 5 44 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 40 When you open the hood on the VORTEC 8100 V8 engine her
165. bel is attached to the vehicle s center pillar B pillar below the driver s door lock post striker This label lists your vehicle s original equipment tires and their recommended cold tire inflation pressures The recommended cold tire inflation pressure shown on the label is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle s maximum load carrying capacity For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry and an example of the tire and loading information label see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Do not forget to check the spare tire For additional information regarding the spare tire see Spare Tire on page 5 95 How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they re underinflated Check the tire s inflation pressure when the tires are cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km 5 68 Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label no further adjustment is necessary If the inflation pressure is low add air
166. belt See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 58 This message will display and a chime will sound when the ignition is on the driver s seat belt is unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion You should buckle your seat belt If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition is on and the vehicle is in motion the reminder will be repeated If the drivers seat belt is already buckled this message and chime will not come on This message is an additional reminder to the Safety Belt Reminder Light in the instrument panel cluster See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 3 30 3 50 Pressing any of the four DIC buttons if equipped will acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC display If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC display CHANGE ENGINE OIL This message is displayed when the engine oil needs to be changed and service is required for your vehicle See your GM dealer See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 and Engine Oil on page 5 17 for more information Also see Engine Oil Life System on page 5 20 for information on how to reset the message This message will clear itself after 10 seconds until the next ignition cycle CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE On some vehicles if there is a problem with the generator and battery charging system this message will appear on the DIC a chime will sound and the chargi
167. best setting to use when plowing snow 4LO This setting also engages your front axle and delivers extra torque You may never need this setting It sends maximum power to all four wheels You might choose 4LO if you are driving off road in deep sand deep mud deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills Four wheel drive vehicles with StabiliTrak will not engage in this mode See StabiliTrak System on page 4 10 for more information Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P You or someone else could be seriously injured Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in NEUTRAL See Parking Brake on page 2 40 NEUTRAL N Shift the vehicle s transfer case to NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4 56 or Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 56 for more information Indicator lights in the button show which setting you are in The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on If the lights do not come on you should take your vehicle to your dealer for service An indicator light will flash while shifting the transfer case It will remain illuminated when the shift is complete If for some reason the transfer case cannot make a requested shift it will return to the last chosen setting If the SERVICE 4WD message stays on you should take your vehicle to
168. bs removed in different ways For proper type and length see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on Exterior Lamp Bulb Number page 6 15 Backup Lamp etd To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do Daytime Running Lamps DRL 4114K the following P ener mann 3157A or 3457NA 1 Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it is Headlamps facing away from the windshield High Beam 9011 or 9005 9006 Rear Marker Turn Signal Lamp 3157 Taillamp and Stoplamp Sidemarker Lamp 194 Vehicles with Body Side Cladding For replacement bulbs not listed here contact your dealer 5 60 Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous e Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires The resulting accident could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold See Inflation Tire 2 Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly toward the driver s side of the vehicle 3 Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2 Pressure on page 5 67 Overinflated tires are more likely to be Tires cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by Keep t
169. button while LOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices LOCK FEEDBACK BOTH default The parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the horn will chirp the second time you press the lock button LOCK FEEDBACK LAMPS The parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter LOCK FEEDBACK HORN The horn will chirp the second time you press the button with the lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter LOCK FEEDBACK OFF There will be no feedback when locking the vehicle Choose one of the available options and press the customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature 3 60 Unlock Feedback Press the customization button until UNLOCK FEEDBACK appears in the display To select your preference for the feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter press the select button while UNLOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices UNLOCK FEEDBACK LAMPS default The parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter UNLOCK FEEDBACK HORN The horn will chirp the second time you press th
170. by warranty Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance is important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle To help protect our environment and to keep your vehicle in good condition be sure to maintain your vehicle properly Using Your Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition But we do not know exactly how you will drive it You may drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You may use your vehicle in making deliveries Or you may drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You may need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition see your GM Goodwrench dealer This schedule is for vehicles that e carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits You will find these limits on the tire and loading information label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 e are driven on reasonable road
171. can be adjusted so you can have a clear view of objects behind you To extend the manual camper mirrors pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility Adjust the mirror glass manually to the desired position To extend the power camper mirrors move the selector switch located above the mirror control to the middle position The mirror control will illuminate Press the left or right side of the mirror control to slide the mirror heads away or toward the body of the vehicle Adjust the mirror glass by using the power mirror switches See Outside Power Mirrors on page 2 51 Outside Power Mirrors The controls are located on the driver s door armrest Move the upper selector switch to the left or right to choose the mirror to be adjusted then press the dots located below the selector switch on the four way control pad to adjust the direction of each mirror The mirrors may also include a memory function which works in conjunction with the memory seats See Memory Seat on page 2 85 for more information 2 51 Power Folding Mirrors To fold or unfold the mirrors move the selector switch located above the mirror control to the middle position The mirror control will illuminate Press the right or left side of the mirror control to fold or unfold the mirrors The mirror will adjust as it folds in and will reposition itself once it is unfolded If the mirrors are accidentally folded unfolded manually the
172. can be removed with club soda water To clean use the following instructions 1 For liquids blot with a clean soft white cloth For solids remove as much as possible and then vacuum or brush 2 Apply club soda water to a clean soft white cloth Do not over saturate the cloth should not drip water 3 Clean the entire area Avoid getting the fabric too wet 4 Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to avoid a ring effect 5 Continue cleaning using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled 6 When the stain is removed blot the cleaned area with another dry clean soft white cloth Using Cleaner on Fabric 1 First try the cleaner on an area of the fabric that is not easily seen to make sure the cleaner does not affect the color of the fabric 2 For liquids blot with a clean soft white cloth For solids remove as much as possible and then vacuum or brush 3 Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean soft white cloth Do not apply spray directly to the fabric 4 Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to avoid a ring effect 5 Continue cleaning using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled 6 When the stain is removed blot the cleaned area with another dry clean soft white cloth 7 If the cleaner leaves a ring effect follow up with the club soda water instructions given earlier in this section Special Fabric Cleaning Problems Stains caus
173. cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects Secure the cargo properly Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle s center of gravity making it more likely to roll over You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over Put heavy loads inside the cargo area not on the roof Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible You will find other important information in this manual See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 Luggage Carrier on page 2 61 and Tires on page 5 61 Environmental Concerns Off road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation However it also raises environmental concerns We recognize these concerns and urge every off roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment Always use established trails roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off road recreational driving obey all posted regulations Avoid any driving practice that could damage the environment shrubs flowers trees grasses or disturb wildlife this includes wheel spinning breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground Always carry a litter bag make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving Take extreme care with open fires where permitted camp stoves and lanterns Never park your vehicle over
174. cated on top of the steering column Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in and even if the key is not in the ignition Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off Press the button again to turn the flashers off When the hazard warning flashers are on your turn signals will not work Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles you can set them up at the side of the road about 300 feet 100 m behind your vehicle Horn To sound the horn press the center pad on the steering wheel Tilt Wheel Turn Signal Multifunction Lever The tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following e Turn and Lane Change Signals Turn and Lane Change Signals on page 3 8 e D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 3 8 e Flash to Pass Feature See Flash to Pass on page 3 9 The tilt lever is located on the driver s side of the e W Windshield Wipers See Windshield Wipers on steering column under the turn signal lever page 3 9 To tilt the wheel hold the steering wheel and pull the e amp Windshield Washer See Windshield Washer lever Move the steering wheel to a comfortable on page 3 10 level then release the le
175. ce of a disc is soiled dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution and clean it wiping from the center to the edge Be sure never to touch the side without writing when handling discs Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge Care of Your CD and DVD Player The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged If the mast should ever become slightly bent straighten it out by hand If the mast is badly bent replace it Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still tightened to the cowl If tightening is required tighten by hand then with a wrench one quarter turn 3 104 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of your vehicle Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up for clear radio reception The performance of the XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere with the performance of the XM system Make sure that the XM satellite antenna is not obstructed Chime Level Adjustment The radio is the vehicle chime producer To change the volume level press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio power off T
176. ce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle After you ve loaded your trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they aren t you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires Be sure your vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires You ll find these numbers on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver s door or see Tires on page 5 61 Then be sure you don t go over the GVW and rear axle limits for your vehicle including the weight of the trailer tongue If you use a weight distributing hitch make sure you don t go over the rear axle limit before you apply the weight distributing spring bars Hitches It s important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you ll need the right hitch Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight Carrying Hitches A Body to Ground Distance B Front of Vehicle When using a weight distributing hitch the hitch must be adjusted so that the distance A remains the same both before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle If you ll be pulling a trailer that when loaded will weigh more than 5 000 Ibs 2 270 kg be sure to use a properly mounted weight distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size This equipment is very important for
177. ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeaes 2 41 Shifting Out of Park P ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 2 43 Signals Turn and Lane Change 0055 3 8 Spare Vite szscisiedesdensptedesageardadapeaceaangeateccenceacss 5 95 WSTAUNING epean eaea pee A OaE 5 82 REMOVING eoria onna 5 79 SONNO geeneen NEn aaa i a NE 5 92 Specifications Capacities cceeeeeeeees 5 114 Speedometer cccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaes 3 30 StabiliTrak System iinternet 4 10 Starting Your Engine eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 2 29 11 SICCHING egean aa e OE 4 13 Steering Wheel Controls Audio 065 3 102 Steering Wheel Tilt Wheel 0ceeeeeeeeee 3 7 Storage Areas All Weather Cargo Area ccceeeneeeeeneee tenes 2 72 Center Console Storage Area e eeeeeeee 2 60 Center Overhead Console seeeeeee 2 60 Front Armrest Storage Area e ceeeeeeeeee ees 2 60 GIOVE BOX 2 62 senscectaiclaasseageetG Are EESE 2 60 Luggage Carrier ccceceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeae es 2 61 Rear Storage Area ccecceeeeeeteeeee eee een teen es 2 61 Top Box Storage ceceeeeeeeee eee eee een eeeeeneeeees 2 77 Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow 0 0006 4 44 SUN VISOIS sec ic oi chacenatacsasenetels ss oi SE EERS 2 25 SUMMOOT piaia eae amen paeem ease EOE 2 84 Tachometer 2 2 0 ececeeeeeeeee cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 30 TANG A
178. cement of the tire if not covered by a warrantable failure e Jump Start No start occurrences which require a battery jump start will be covered at no charge e Dealer Locator Service In many instances mechanical failures are covered under Chevrolet s Bumper to Bumper warranty However when other services are utilized our Roadside Assistance Representatives will explain any payment obligations you might incur For prompt and efficient assistance when calling please provide the following to the Roadside Assistance Representative e Your name home address and home telephone number e Telephone number of your location e Location of the vehicle e Model year color and license plate number e Mileage Vehicle Identification Number VIN and delivery date of the vehicle e Description of the problem While we hope you never have the occasion to use our service it is added security while traveling for you and your family Remember we are only a phone call away Chevrolet Roadside Assistance 1 800 CHEV USA 1 800 234 8872 text telephone TTY users call 1 888 889 2438 Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or driver when in Chevrolet s judgement the claims become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Chevrolet reserves the right to make any changes o
179. ces 5 32 Cruise Control Lever cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 10 Cruise Control Light ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 3 43 Customer Assistance Information Courtesy Transportation cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 7 7 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TY USGI aai a E E 7 4 Customer Assistance Offices eeeeeeeee 7 4 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 0 08 7 2 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 7 5 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian GOVEINMENL ccc eect e cece eee eee eeeeeneeaeeneees 7 11 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government cceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 7 10 Roadside Assistance Program eeeeeeeeee 7 6 Service Publications Ordering Information 7 11 Daytime Running Lamps seecececceerecerererern 3 15 Defensive Driving srrsrnas riip mariinien anness 4 2 Delayed Locking zasrnirrmiiiennrs neaei 2 9 Doing Your Own Service Work saesecceecececeee 5 4 D me Lamps rnuson ea 3 18 Door Delayed LOCKING sirvieron 2 9 LOCKS cae danGnuatabeaedate he a E E tenses aitay 2 8 Power Door LOCKS wii ccccetcateiietaceectis ned nesdeteanents 2 9 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 10 Rear Door Security LOCKS cceeeeeeeeee ees 2 12 Driver Position Safety Belt cc ceceeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 1 14 Driver Information Center DIC eeeeee 3
180. cing Restraint System Parts After a Crash arimari ianiai ee 1 51 oa 1 54 Pere 1 55 nits 1 56 Sachs 1 56 Front Seats Power Seats Manual Passenger Seat If your vehicle has power seat s the controls are located on the outboard edge of the front seats If your vehicle has a manual front passenger split bench seat you can adjust it with this lever located at the front of the seat Lift the lever to unlock the seat and use your body to slide the seat to where you want it Release the lever and try to move the seat with your body to make sure that the seat is locked into place Horizontal Control This control adjusts the Power Lumbar seat cushion e Raise or lower the front of the seat by raising or lowering the forward edge of the control Raise or lower the rear of the seat by raising or lowering the rear edge of the control If your vehicle has power lumbar adjustment you can use it to increase or decrease lumbar support in the lower seatback The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion e Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the whole control toward the front or toward the rear of the vehicle e Lower or raise the entire seat cushion by moving the whole control up or down Vertical Control This control adjusts the seatback Move the reclining front seatback rearward or forward by e To increase support in the lower back area press moving the control toward the rear o
181. ck when each latch locks correctly 2 71 Cargo Tie Downs There are cargo tie downs in the rear cargo area that you can use to strap cargo in The tie downs are also used to secure the cargo cover panel storage bag or the tonneau cover storage bag if your vehicle is equipped with either For more information see Cargo Cover Panels earlier in this section and Tonneau Cover on page 2 78 2 72 All Weather Cargo Area Your vehicle has the ability to operate in many different configurations cargo panels on or off midgate up or down rear glass in or out allowing the cargo and passenger area to be open to the environment To allow the vehicle to operate in these configurations it is equipped with features to help it resist the elements and protect cargo inside the cargo area Parts of the water management system which is designed to quickly direct water out of the cargo box are the top drain grates side rail channels catch cups midgate drain cargo area floor drains and the rubber cargo mat Even when the water management system is working D Front drains properly and the cover system is on there may be some E Water drainage area around both sides of the box instances heavy rains automated car washes etc and the tailgate side when water may be present in the following areas F Rear drains G Cargo floor H Cargo mat central area of mat is intended to be dry Maintenance and Cleaning To ensure that
182. cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all You can get wet ice when it is about freezing 32 F 0 C and freezing rain begins to fall Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there Whatever the condition smooth ice packed blowing or loose snow drive with caution If you have traction assist it will improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road But you can turn the traction assist system off if you ever need to You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand mud ice or snow See f You Are Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 44 Even though your vehicle has a traction system you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions Under certain conditions you may want to turn the traction assist system off such as when driving through deep snow and loose gravel to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds See Traction Assist System TAS on page 4 8 If you do not have a traction system accelerate gently Try not to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more 4 41 Your anti lock brakes improve your vehicle s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road Even though you have an anti lock braking system you will want to b
183. crease in skipping difficulty in finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur try a known good CD Do not add paper labels to CDs they could get caught in the CD player If an error appears on the display see CD Messages later in this section LOAD Press this button to load CDs into the CD player This CD player will hold up to six CDs To insert one CD do the following 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Press and release the LOAD button 3 84 3 Wait for the indicator light located to the right of the slot to turn green 4 Load a CD Insert the CD part way into the slot label side up The player will pull the CD in To insert multiple CDs do the following 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds You will hear a beep and the indicator light located to the right of the slot will begin to flash and MULTI LOAD will appear on the display 3 Once the light stops flashing and turns green INSERT CD will appear on the display load a CD Insert the CD part way into the slot label side up The player will pull the CD in Once the CD is loaded the indicator light will begin flashing again Once the light stops flashing and turns green you can load another CD The CD player takes up to six CDs Do not try to load more than six To load more than one CD but less than six complete Steps 1 through 3 When finished loading CDs press the
184. cy Driving extended miles km and or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided Notice After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode to avoid engine damage allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair The engine oil will be severely degraded Repair the cause of coolant loss change the oil and reset the oil life system See Engine Oil on page 5 17 5 32 Cooling System When you decide it is safe to lift the hood here is what you will see ae G S 5300 V8 Engine A Coolant Surge Tank B Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap C Electric Engine Cooling Fan If Equipped An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling do not do anything else until it cools down The vehicle should be parked on a level surface 8100 V8 Engine A Coolant Surge Tank B Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap C Engine Driven Cooling Fan 5 33 When the engine is cold the coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD mark If it is not you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses heater hoses radiator water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts
185. d Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle If you have a lot of options equipment passengers or cargo in your vehicle it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle can carry which will also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow And if you will tow a trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 for more information about your vehicle s maximum load capacity 4 66 The trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B up to a maximum of 600 Ibs 272 kg with a weight carrying hitch The trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B up to a maximum of 1 000 lbs 454 kg for the 1500 series and up to a maximum of 1 500 Ibs 680 kg for the 2500 series with a weight distributing hitch Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for your vehicle Choose the shortest hitch extension that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle This will help redu
186. d and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if the wiper blade chatters when running wax sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass cleaning liquid or powder and water solution The windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed with water Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent Then rinse the blade with water Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary replace blades that look worn Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels The vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or chrome plated wheels Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied Notice If you use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes cleaners brushes or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome plated wheels you could damage the surface of the wheel s The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Use only GM approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome plated wheels The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle Do not use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abras
187. d be seriously injured Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in NEUTRAL See Parking Brake on page 2 40 6 Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL N See Four Wheel Drive on page 2 35 for the proper procedure to select the neutral position for your vehicle 7 Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle Turn the ignition off and lock the steering column If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for six weeks or more remove the battery cable from the negative terminal post of the battery to prevent your battery from draining while towing Rear Towing Rear Wheels Off the Ground Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle from the rear 1 2 3 Drive the vehicle onto the dolly Firmly set the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 2 40 for more information Put the transmission in PARK P 4 Follow the dolly manufacturer s instructions to attach and secure the vehicle being towed to the dolly and then the loaded dolly to the tow vehicle Make sure the wheels are straight before towing Make sure the wheels are straight before proceeding to the next steps Use an adequate clamping device to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position 4 59 5 6 Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the tow vehicle
188. d either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep The radio will go to a station play for a few seconds then go on to the next station Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows again to stop scanning To scan preset stations press and hold either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds PSCN will appear on the display and you will hear a double beep The radio will go to a preset station play for a few seconds then go on to the next preset station Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows again to stop scanning presets The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band Setting Preset Stations Up to 30 stations six FM1 six FM2 and six AM six XM1 and six XM2 if equipped can be programed on the six numbered pushbuttons by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press BAND to select FM1 FM2 AM or XM1 or XM2 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever that numbered pushbutton is pressed the station that was set will return for that pushbutton 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton To store an equalization setting to a preset station perform the following 1 Tune to the preset station 2 Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select the equalization setting Once the equalization no longer appears on th
189. d hold both the desired button on HomeLink and the hand held transmitter button Do not release the buttons until Step 4 has been completed Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure noted in Gate Operator and Canadian Programming later in this section The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after HomeLink successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons Press and hold the newly trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons begin with Step 2 under Programming HomeLink Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the programmed channels If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device most commonly a garage door opener 2 58 6 Locate in the garage the garage door opener receiver motor head unit Locate the Learn or Smart button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit 7 Firmly press and release the Learn or Smart button The name and col
190. d in this manual and the Index will help you find them quickly If you re trailering it s a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight 4 71 Trailer Wiring Harness The Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL wire Heavy Duty Trailer Wiring Package is tied next to the trailer wiring harness for use with a trailer The eight wire harness contains the following trailer circuits e Yellow Left Stop Turn Signal e Dark Green Right Stop Turn Signal e Brown Taillamps e White Ground e Light Green Back up Lamps e Light Blue CHMSL e Red Battery Feed e Dark Blue Trailer Brake If you are charging a remote non vehicle battery turn on the headlamps to boost the vehicle system voltage and properly charge the battery Your vehicle is equipped with the eight wire trailer towing harness This harness with a seven pin universal heavy duty trailer connector is attached to a bracket on the hitch platform 4 72 Instrument Panel Jumper Wiring Harness This harness may be included with your vehicle as part of the heavy duty trailer wiring package This harness is for an electric brake controller and includes a trailer battery feed fuse It should be installed by your dealer or a qualified service center Four Wire Harness Adapter This adapter may be included with your vehicle as part of the heavy duty
191. d must be supported by receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair Generally it is not possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information Courtesy Transportation is available during the Bumper to Bumper warranty coverage period but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating GM dealers and all program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact your GM dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel Canadian Vehicles For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty alternative transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program Please consult your dealer for details General Moto
192. d who has outgrown child restraints e or if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system When the passenger sensing system has turned off the passenger s frontal air bag the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit turn the vehicle off Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following the child restraint manufacturer s directions and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 1 46 1 59 If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicator is still lit check to make sure that the vehicle s seatback is not pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion If this happens slightly recline the vehicle s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint If this happens adjust the head restraint If the on indicator is still lit secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your dealer The passenger sensing system is designed to enable may inflate the right front passenger s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger s seat When the passenger sensing system has allowed
193. dards The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number TIN an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer production plant brand and date of production GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle KiloPascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure Light Truck LT Metric Tire A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles 5 65 Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions Outward Facing
194. djust the display level to the middle position To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker controls are displayed ALL CENTERED will appear on the display and you will hear a beep Finding a Program Type PTY Station RDS and XM To select and find a desired PTY perform the following 1 Press the TYPE button to activate program type select mode P TYPE and the last selected PTY will appear on the display 2 Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the TYPE button to select a PTY 3 Once the desired PTY is displayed press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to select and to take you to the PTY s first station 4 To go to another station within that PTY and the PTY is displayed press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows once If the PTY is not displayed go back to Step 1 5 Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to exit program type select mode 3 79 SCAN Scan the stations within a PTY by performing the following 1 Press the TYPE button to activate program type select mode P TYPE and the last selected PTY will appear on the display 2 Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the TYPE button to select a PTY 3 Once the desired PTY is displayed press and hold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for two seconds and the radio will begin scanning the stations in the PTY 4 Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop at a station
195. driving and should not try to do so 3 89 Headphones The RSE system includes two sets of wireless headphones Each set of headphones has an ON OFF control An indicator light will illuminate on the headphones when they are on If the light does not illuminate the batteries may need to be replaced See Battery Replacement following for more information Each set of headphones has a volume knob To adjust the volume adjust this knob The transmitters are located below the video display screen The headphones will shut off automatically if they lose the signal from the system after about four minutes to save battery power The signal may be lost if the system is turned off or if the headphones are out of range of the transmitters When using the wired headphones if the front seat passengers play a CD in the Radio with Six Disc CD if equipped or use XM Satellite Radio Service if equipped you will hear the audio for these sources instead of the DVD or CD that is currently playing through the RSE Notice Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunlight This could damage the headphones and repairs would not be covered by your warranty Keep the headphones stored in a cool dry place 3 90 Battery Replacement To change the batteries do the following 1 Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door located on the left side of the headphone earpiece 2 Replace the two AAA batteries in the compar
196. dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle s exhaust system Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip especially when going to a remote area Know the terrain and plan your route You are much less likely to get bad surprises Get accurate maps of trails and terrain Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle If something happens to one of them the other can help quickly Does your vehicle have a winch If so be sure to read the winch instructions In a remote area a winch can be handy if you get stuck But you will want to know how to use it properly Getting Familiar with Off Road Driving It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness Off road driving does require some new and different skills Here is what we mean Tune your senses to different kinds of signals Your eyes for example need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds With your arms hands feet and body you will need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce 4 20 Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off road driving One of the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed Here are some things to keep in mind At higher speeds e you approach things faste
197. e s wheels are slipping the traction control system will activate and this message will appear on the DIC For more information see Traction Assist System TAS on page 4 8 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 10 TRACTION SYS LIMITED If the brake traction control system activates constantly or if the brakes have heated up due to high speed braking brake traction control will be disabled and the TRACTION SYS LIMITED message will be displayed For more information on the StabiliTrak system and traction control see StabiliTrak System on page 4 10 TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE If the transmission fluid gets hot this message will appear on the DIC along with a continuous chime Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the transmission to cool This message will clear and the chime will stop when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level Notice If you drive your vehicle while the transmission fluid is overheating and the transmission temperature warning is displayed on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC you can damage the transmission This could lead to costly repairs that would not be covered by your warranty Do not drive your vehicle with overheated transmission fluid or while transmission temperature warning is displayed TRANSMISSION HOT If the transmission fluid temperature becomes high this message will appear on the DIC displ
198. e damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others e Dispense gasoline only into approved containers Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete e Do not smoke while pumping gasoline Checking Things Under Hood Release the Hood To open the hood do the following 1 Pull the handle located inside the vehicle to the lower left of the steering wheel An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like fuel oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine ty earns JA INNO Vehicles with Body Side Cladding Vehicles without Body Side Cladding 2 Then go to the front of the vehicle and push left on the secondary hood release located under the front emblem for vehicles with gray body side cladding or above the emblem for vehicles with no body side cladding 3 Lift the hood Before closing the hood
199. e vehicle check the door for obstacles and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC Pressing any of the four DIC buttons if equipped will clear the message from the DIC display If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clear the message from the DIC display ENGINE COOLANT HOT If the cooling system temperature gets hot this message will appear in the DIC Stop the vehicle and let the engine idle in PARK P to allow the coolant to reach a safe temperature This message will clear when the coolant temperature drops to a safe operating temperature Pressing any of the four DIC buttons if equipped will clear the message from the DIC display If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clear the message from the DIC display 3 51 ENGINE OVERHEATED If the engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for operation this message will appear in the DIC and you will hear a chime Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe damage This message will clear when the engine has cooled to a safe operating temperature Notice f you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not increase the en
200. e 4 10 OnStar and Radio Steering Wheel Buttons If Equipped See OnStar System on page 2 54 and Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 102 Instrument Panel Cluster See nstrument Panel Cluster on page 3 29 Shift Lever Tow Haul Selector Button See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2 32 and Tow Haul Mode on page 2 35 Audio System See Audio System s on page 3 64 Dome Override Button See Dome Lamps on page 3 18 zz Fog Lamps Button See Fog Lamps on page 3 16 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever See Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on page 3 7 Hood Release See Hood Release on page 5 12 Tilt Lever See Tilt Wheel on page 3 7 Driver Information Center DIC Buttons See Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 45 Parking Brake Release See Parking Brake on page 2 40 Climate Control Systems See Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3 22 and Dual Climate Control System on page 3 20 Lighter If Equipped or Accessory Power Outlet If Equipped See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter on page 3 19 and Accessory Power Outlets on page 3 19 Accessory Power Outlet If Equipped See Accessory Power Outlets on page 3 19 Glove Box See Glove Box on page 2 60 Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others They also let police know you have a problem Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off The hazard warning flasher button is lo
201. e Heated Mirrors cceseeeeeeenee eee ee 2 53 Outside Power Mirrors 0cceseeeeeeeeeeeenee 2 51 MYGMLINK COM swecesitioes i einasi n EEEE 7 3 Navigation Radio System eseeeeeeeneeeeeees 3 100 New Vehicle Break In sceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 28 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 15 OdOMCtGh sersan ran nnee ERTA EE 3 30 Off Road ReCOVETY cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaes 4 15 Oil ENQING se acasiocecbadan deeb aiae neni r naa cates Eee 5 17 Pressure Gages vicinccsieid aieiaa eiaa 3 42 Older Children Restraints cccceceeeee eee 1 29 Online Owner Center ccceeeeeee teense ete eee eens 7 3 OnStar System siisii aaisan auai iiiaae 2 54 Operating Your All Wheel Drive Vehicle Off Paved ROadS scc ssecthctiwess ceeded ivi saess 4 18 Other Warning Devices ccceeeeeeeeeeee eee eee reas 3 6 Outlet Adjustment ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 27 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb MeW ASSIST cacsca iss evia andi eeeiadiedia se ianrs eset 2 53 Camper Type Mirrors ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 2 51 Convex Mirror sinenion ea a En EEE 2 52 Heated MINOrs ioiscccsics saccccadeinieaenenccdchceteneveans 2 53 Power Mirrors 0cececeeeeeeeee eset ee eeeeeeeeees 2 51 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode 5 32 Owner Checks and Services ceeeeeeeeeeeees 6 9 Owners Canadian os scs cscve
202. e are four conditions that can cause this message to appear e One condition is overheating which could occur if StabiliTrak activates continuously for an extended period of time e The message will also be displayed if the brake system warning light is on See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 35 e The message could be displayed if the stability system takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic checks due to driving conditions e Also if an engine or vehicle related problem has been detected and the vehicle needs service the message will appear See your GM dealer The message will turn off as soon as the conditions that caused the message to be displayed are no longer present For more information on the StabiliTrak system see StabiliTrak System on page 4 10 3 56 TIGHTEN FUEL CAP If the vehicle s fuel cap is not tightened properly this message may appear along with the check engine light on the instrument panel See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 39 Reinstall the fuel cap making sure to fully install the cap See Filling Your Tank on page 5 9 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light and message off TRACTION ACTIVE When the traction control system has detected that any of the vehicl
203. e button with the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter UNLOCK FEEDBACK BOTH The parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the horn will chirp the second time you press the unlock button UNLOCK FEEDBACK OFF There will be no feedback when unlocking the vehicle Choose one of the available options and press the customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature Headlamp Delay Press the customization button until HEADLAMP DELAY appears in the display To select your preference for how long the headlamps will stay on when you turn off the vehicle press the select button while HEADLAMP DELAY is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices e HEADLAMP DELAY 10 SEC default e HEADLAMP DELAY 20 SEC e HEADLAMP DELAY 40 SEC e HEADLAMP DELAY 1 MIN e HEADLAMP DELAY 2 MIN e HEADLAMP DELAY 3 MIN e HEADLAMP DELAY OFF The amount of time you choose will be the amount of time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off the vehicle If you choose off the headlamps will turn off as soon as you turn off the vehicle Choose one of the available options and press the customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature Perimeter Lights Press the customization button until PERIMETER LIGH
204. e display the equalization will be set for that preset station 3 67 Setting the Tone Bass Treble AUDIO Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS or TREB appears on the display Turn the knob to increase or to decrease The display will show the bass or treble level If a station is weak or noisy decrease the treble To adjust the bass and treble to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display level to the middle position To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed ALL CENTERED will appear on the display you will hear a beep and the display level will be adjusted to the middle position AUTO EQ Automatic Equalization Press this button to select customized equalization settings designed for country western jazz talk pop rock and classical Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or treble returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for each preset and source If the radio is equipped with the Bose audio system the equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK 3 68 Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade AUDIO To adjust the balance between the right and the left speakers push and release the AUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right or the lef
205. e eee eees 3 104 Cargo Area All Weather 0cceceeeeeeeeeees 2 72 Cargo Cover Panels ceeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeenes 2 62 Center Console Storage Area ceeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 60 Center Front Passenger Position Safety Belts 1 22 Center Overhead Console 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 60 Chains TIe ccsdccecicesnces aonan nani senteseedensacess 5 76 Charging System Light ceeeeeeeeeeeeee teens 3 33 Check Engine Light cctceicc tiectazentnnanatantenedectecaanactntye 3 39 Checking Things Under the Hood 5 5 12 Chemical Paint Spotting cceeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 102 Child Restraints Child Restraint Systems cceeeeeeeeee teens 1 35 Infants and Young Children o 1 32 Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children LATCH System 0 eeeeeeeeeeee 1 41 Older Children siririn riaan en 1 29 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System c eeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 1 43 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 1 43 Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position ceeeeeee 1 45 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position 1 46 TOP Stal emedan na O da needs 1 39 Top Strap Anchor Location eeeeeeeee ees 1 40 Where to Put the Restraint eee 1 38 Chime Level Adjustment ceeeeeee t
206. e is what you will see aye fs a Hy ie N 5 iD AQ De A A A ea Cy X D i IE A tae sy Beas x V ty Drie Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 22 Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap See Cooling System on page 5 32 and Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5 30 Air Filter Restriction Indicator If Equipped See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 22 Engine Oil Dipstick See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 17 Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick See Checking the Fluid Level under Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5 25 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 17 Engine Driven Cooling Fan See Cooling System on page 5 32 Remote Negative Terminal GND See Jump Starting on page 5 45 Remote Positive Terminal See Jump Starting on page 5 45 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir See Power Steering Fluid on page 5 38 Brake Fluid Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 5 41 Underhood Fuse Block See Underhood Fuse Block on page 5 109 M Battery See Battery on page 5 44 N Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 40 Engine Oil If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears on the instrument cluster it means you need to check your engine oil level right
207. e jack Use one hand to push against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out from under the spare tire with the other hand If the spare tire is hanging from the cable insert the hoist handle extension and wheel wrench into the hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest of the way 5 91 14 Tilt the retainer D at the end of the cable and pull it through the wheel opening Pull the tire out from under the vehicle 15 Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable back up if the cable is hanging under the vehicle Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using the hoist assembly until it has been replaced To continue changing the flat tire see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5 82 5 92 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place Notice Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire under your vehicle for an extended period of time or with the valve stem pointing up may damage the wheel Always stow the wheel with the valve stem pointing down and have the wheel tire repaired as soon as possible 1 Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the
208. e light will come on The light will go off a few seconds after the rough road conditions go away or when the vehicle comes to a complete stop This is normal operation For more information on the traction off light and StabiliTrak see StabiliTrak System on page 4 10 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage United States Canada This gage shows the engine coolant temperature It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is working During a majority of the operation the gage will read 210 F 100 C or less If you are pulling a load or going up hills it is normal for the temperature to fluctuate and approach the 250 F 122 C mark If the gage reaches the 260 F 125 C mark it indicates that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity See Engine Overheating on page 5 30 3 37 Transmission Temperature Gage Canada United States Your vehicle may be equipped with a transmission temperature gage When your ignition is on the gage shows the temperature of the transmission fluid The normal operating range is from 180 F 82 C to about 200 F 93 C At approximately 265 F 130 C the driver information center will display a TRANSMISSION HOT message and the transmission will enter a transmission protection mode When the transmission enters the protection 3 38 mode you may notice a change in the transmission shifting patterns The transmission will return to normal shifting patt
209. e on briefly when you turn on the ignition but the engine is not running as a check to show you it is working It should go out once the engine is running If it stays on or comes on while you are driving you may have a problem with the charging system It could indicate that you have problems with a generator drive belt or another electrical problem Have it checked right away Driving while this light is on could drain your battery When this light comes on the DIC will also display the battery not charging message See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 If you must drive a short distance with the light on be certain to turn off all your accessories such as the radio and air conditioner 3 33 Voltmeter Gage When your engine is not running but the ignition is in RUN this gage shows your battery s state of charge in DC volts When the engine is running the gage shows the condition of the charging system The gage may transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher reading this is normal Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range 3 34 Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle As engine speeds are increased this condi
210. e sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you do not explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Do not get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately 5 47 Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 5 Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive or to a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not connect positive to negative or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the dead battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one 5 48 10 qi Do not let the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Now connect the black negative cable to the negative terminal of the good
211. e that is integrated into the vehicle Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice commands with no additional contracts and no additional roaming charges To find out more about OnStar Personal Calling refer to the OnStar user s guide in the vehicle s glove box visit www onstar com or www onstarcanada com or speak to an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 OnStar Virtual Advisor Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Personal Calling that uses minutes to access up to date weather and traffic reports for your area news and sports updates stock quotes entertainment and more You are also able to listen and reply to E mail through the vehicle s audio system Customize your information profile at www myonstar com See the OnStar user s guide for more information OnStar Steering Wheel Controls A steering wheel control can be used to interact with the OnStar personal calling feature Press the control with this symbol on the e steering wheel to make a phone call When calling into voice mail systems or to dial directory numbers press the control say the number s then say dial See the OnStar user s guide for more information 2 55 HomeLink Transmitter HomeLink a combined universal transmitter and receiver provides a way to replace up to three hand held transmitters used to activate devices such as gate opera
212. e when you turn your ignition key to START or RUN The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off will be visible on the rearview mirror during the system check When the system check is complete either the word ON or the word OFF or the symbol for on or the symbol for off will be visible See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 32 If your rearview mirror does not have either of the indicators pictured then your vehicle does not have the passenger sensing system PASSENGER AIR BAG eam ON Passenger Airbag Status Indicator United States 1 58 Ro Ri Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Canada The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag under certain conditions The driver s airbag and the side airbags are not part of the passenger sensing system The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger s seat and safety belt The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the passenger s frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or not Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat General Motors recommends that child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant riding in a rear facing infant seat a child riding in a forward facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat You
213. e will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant Notice If you use an improper coolant mixture your engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts If you have to add coolant more than four times a year have your dealer check your cooling system Notice If you use the proper coolant you do not have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system These can be harmful Checking Coolant The coolant surge tank is located in the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for more information on location Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly Never turn the surge tank pressure cap even a little when the engine and radiator are hot The vehicle must be on a level surface When your engine is cold the coolant level should be at the FULL COLD mark If your vehicle is equipped with the LOW COOLAN
214. econds The door locks should cycle to confirm synchronization If the locks do not cycle see your dealer for service 1 Insert a thin object such as a coin in the slot between the covers of the transmitter housing near the key ring hole Remove the bottom by twisting the coin 2 Remove and replace the battery with a three volt CR2032 or equivalent battery positive side up Align the covers and snap them together 4 Resynchronize the transmitter See Resynchronization following this information 5 Check the operation of the transmitter w Doors and Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle To unlock the door from the outside use the keyless ntr m or the key Door Locks entry system or the key To unlock or lock the door from the inside slide the manual lever forward or rearward Unlocked doors can be dangerous e Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle will not open it You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked So wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it Outsiders can easily enter thr
215. ed can make wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 78 When It Is Time for New Tires One way to tell when it s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which will appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining Some commercial truck tires may not have treadwear indicators You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric The tire has a bump bulge or split The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that can t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage 5 71 Buying New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires you need look at the Certification Tire label or the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 for more information about these labels and where they can be found on your vehicle The tires installed on your vehicle when
216. ed you can change the TAS automatic engagement feature so that the system will not come on automatically when the engine is started To do so 1 Park the vehicle with the ignition off and the transmission in PARK P 2 Turn the ignition to RUN do not start the engine 3 Apply the brake pedal shift into NEUTRAL N press the accelerator pedal to the floor and then press the TAS on off button and hold it down for at least six seconds 4 Release the TAS button and both pedals 5 Turn off the ignition and wait a few seconds The next time you start your vehicle the TAS will not automatically come on You can restore the automatic feature by using the same procedure Whether the TAS is set to come on automatically or not you can always turn the system on or off by pressing the TAS on off button Locking Rear Axle If your vehicle has this feature it can give you additional traction on snow mud ice sand or gravel It works like a standard axle most of the time but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle StabiliTrak System Your vehicle may be equipped with StabiliTrak which combines antilock brake traction and stability control systems and helps the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving conditions When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive away the system performs several diagnostic
217. ed by such things as catsup black coffee egg fruit fruit juice milk soft drinks vomit urine and blood can be removed using the club soda water instructions given earlier in this section If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine treat the area with a water and baking soda solution 1 teaspoon 5 ml of baking soda to 1 cup 250 ml of lukewarm water Let dry Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with an approved GM cleaner and a clean white cloth 1 Carefully scrape off excess stain 2 Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely 3 If a stain remains follow the Using Cleaner on Fabric instructions described earlier 5 97 Vinyl Use warm water and a clean cloth e Rub with a clean damp cloth to remove dirt This may have to be done more than once e Things like tar asphalt and shoe polish will stain if they are not removed quickly Use a clean cloth and vinyl cleaner See your dealer for this product Leather Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth Then let the leather dry naturally Do not use heat to dry e For stubborn stains use a leather cleaner e Never use oils varnishes solvent based or abrasive cleaners furniture polish or shoe polish on leather e Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately If dirt is allowed to work into the finish it can harm the leather 5 98 Instrument Panel
218. ed high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 5 74 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance If you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other the alignment may need to be reset If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road your wheels may need to be rebalanced Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need
219. ed in revolutions per minute rpm 3 30 Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to RUN or START a chime will be provided for several seconds to remind people to buckle their safety belts The driver safety belt light will also be provided and stay on for several seconds then it will flash for several more You should buckle your seat belt If your vehicle is not equipped with the passenger sensing system this chime and light will be repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion LZ See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 58 for more information If the driver s belt is buckled neither the chime nor the light will come on Airbag Readiness Light There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the airbag symbol The system checks the airbag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem The system check includes the airbag sensors the airbag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the airbag system see Airbag System on page 1 49 This light will come on when you start your vehicle and it will flash for a few seconds Then the light should go out This means the system is ready e N If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving your airbag system may not work properly Have your vehicle servic
220. ed right away If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle it means the airbag system may not be working properly The airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle serviced right away if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem 3 31 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator the status indicator will light either ON or OFF or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system right front passenger s frontal airbag an aie mirror will have a passenger airbag If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger slate meIcator airbag status indicator it means that the right front passenger s frontal airbag is enabled may inflate PASSENGER AIR BAG eam ON If the on indicator comes on when you have a rear facing child restraint installed in the right Passenger Airbag Status Indicator United States front passenger s seat it means that the passenger sensing system has not turned off ieee a oF RO Ab the passenger s frontal airbag A child ina rear facing child restraint can be seriously inju
221. ed to the current song or channel Artist Song Title Category or PTY Channel Number Channel Name To change the default on the display press the INFO knob until you see the display you want then hold the knob until you hear a beep The selected display will now be the default AUTO VOL Automatic Volume With automatic volume the audio system will adjust automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive by increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases Set the volume at the desired level Press this button to select MIN MED or MAX AUTO VOL will appear on the display Each higher setting will provide more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds To turn automatic volume off press this button until AUTO VOL OFF appears on the display Finding a Station BAND Press this button to switch between FM1 FM2 AM or XM1 or XM2 if equipped The display will show the selection lt 1 TUNE Turn this knob to select radio stations Ki SEEK D Press either the SEEK or the TYPE arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band Ki SCAN CI Press and hold either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCN appears on the display and you hear a beep The radio will go to a station play for a few seconds then go on to the next station Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows again to stop sc
222. ed while the vehicle is in PARK P a single chime will sound and the memory position will be recalled To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at any time press one of the memory buttons or power seat controls Easy Exit Seat The controls for this memory function are located on the driver s door Oo Easy Exit Seat This button is used to program and recall the desired driver s seat position when exiting entering the vehicle The seat position can be saved for up to two drivers 2 86 To store the seat exit position do the following 1 Press and release the 1 or 2 button The seat will move to the stored memory position 2 Adjust the seat to the desired exit position 3 Press and hold the exit button of the memory control for three seconds A double chime will sound to let you know that the position has been stored for the selected button 1 or 2 To repeat the procedure for a second driver follow the preceding steps but press the other numbered memory control button To use the seat exit position do one of the following e Press the exit button on the memory control e Or if this feature is activated in the Driver Information Center DIC removing the key from the ignition will move the seat to the exit position See Easy Exit Seat under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 58 for more information on activating this feature in the DIC Section 3 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel
223. eeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeneees 3 64 Thett Deterren cc c cciscicaridicieinncnes ctenncttdatans 3 102 Understanding Reception cece 3 103 Reading Lamps ics css cdectssacs nteanteteneneremanencn 3 18 Real Axle vs tivcietsieuialinivisnaclithaavievand dhe 5 49 LOCKING vzpera uenen 4 10 Rear Door Security Locks ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides 1 26 Rear Seat Audio RSA o ae 3 100 Rear Seat Entertainment System 0 008 3 89 Rear Seat Operation cceeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeee 1 7 Rear Seat Passengers Safety Belts 1 23 Rear Storage Area cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeneees 2 61 Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming with Compass and Temperature Display 2 48 10 Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming with OnStar Compass and Temperature Display 2 45 Reclining Seatbacks ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 5 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 13 Recovery HOOKS w iceccicececteseneensttetendendenendetanends 4 45 Recreational Vehicle Towing eccerre 4 56 Remote Keyless Entry System c eeeeeeeeee ees 2 4 Remote Keyless Entry System Operation 2 5 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare TG eiiaoe aaa an E EE E D 5 82 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 5 79 Replacement Bulbs cceceeeneneeeeeeeeeeeees 5 60 Reporting Safety Defec
224. eeeees 2 62 Storage Areas errereen 2 60 All Weather Cargo Area s s s 2 72 Glove BOK repay adgeebsecedbas cactus actin danneiieecke 2 60 Top Box Storage n 2 77 Center Overhead OON SOE lalla 2 60 Tonneau COVER sesrsirsrirsoniris neriti n aas 2 78 Front Armrest Storage Area c c 2 60 SUNMOOR 2s cic00 steak anino eann Ea Akin 2 84 Center Console Storage Area n e e 2 60 Vehicle Personalization 0 00 c0cccecceceeees 2 85 Luggage Carrier ecseeeee eee eeetee tet teteees 2 61 Memory Seat cccccccccssssescecccceseeeesnenseeeees 2 85 Keys Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The children or others could be badly injured or even killed Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children Your vehicle has one double sided key for the ignition all door locks tailgate and side storage boxes If you ever lose your keys your dealer will be able to assist you with obtaining replacements In an emergency contact roadside assistance See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 for more information If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle you may be able to have your doors unlocked automatically with the OnStar system if you have an active OnStar subscription For more information see OnStar System on page 2 54 Remote Keyless Entry System Your keyless entry syste
225. eel spin Adjust your driving accordingly The traction off light will come on under the following conditions e The Traction Assist System is turned off either by pressing the TAS on off button or turning off the automatic engagement feature of the TAS e The transmission is in FIRST 1 TAS will not operate in this gear This is normal e The vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road When the vehicle leaves the rough surface slows down or stops the light will go off and TAS will be on again This is normal e A Traction Assist System Anti Lock Brake System or engine related problem has been detected and the vehicle needs service See Traction Off Light on page 3 36 The Traction Assist System as delivered from the factory will automatically come on whenever you start your vehicle To limit wheel spin especially in slippery road conditions you should always leave the system on But you can turn the TAS off if you ever need to You should turn the TAS off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required See f You Are Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 44 To turn the system on or off press the TAS on off button located on the instrument panel TC If you used the button to turn the system off the traction off light will come on and stay on You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing the button again The traction off light should go off If desir
226. eers 3 104 Cigarette Lighter cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeaes 3 19 Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 5 101 Exterior Lamps Lenses ceeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 5 99 Fabric Garpet ccvc sccsuccisiishtashees aeseieeglatteesine 5 96 Finish Care ccccecceceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 100 Glass Surfaces srira riaan a 5 98 Instrument Panel cceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 98 Interior Plastic Components 0 eeeeeeeeees 5 98 Leather sasc evtes as ergenteedeeegit Gang lanevaieatess gins 5 98 TOS cuted EE E TE 5 102 Underbody Maintenance sssseseereeernene 5 102 VINY es e e E E 5 98 Washing Your Vehicle eeeeeeeeeeeee eee 5 99 Weatherstrips eirorcose riesi eian iaeia 5 99 Windshield and Wiper Blades 5 5 100 Climate Control System D al ge giant gs ke ace cet e tata cans E neater adatiels 3 20 Dual Automatic cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 22 Outlet Adjustment ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 27 Comfort Guides Rear Safety Belt 0 0 1 26 Content Theft Deterrent eceeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 2 26 Control of a Vehicle ccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 4 5 Coolant Engine Temperature Gage 0 0ceeeeeeeee es 3 37 Heater EnQIn sccesericceteerste atic 2 31 Surge Tank Pressure Cap cceceeeneeeeeeeees 5 30 COOLING Syste M acietdacsdinecsneenchdbecneeneenstie ocacan
227. egin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement See Anti Lock Brake System ABS on page 4 6 e Allow greater following distance on any slippery road e Watch for slippery spots The road might be fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice On an otherwise clear road ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach such as around clumps of trees behind buildings or under bridges Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear If you see a patch of ice ahead of you brake before you are on it Try not to brake while you are actually on the ice and avoid sudden steering maneuvers If You Are Caught in a Blizzard If you are stopped by heavy snow you could be ina serious situation You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow 4 42 Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe e Turn on your hazard flashers e Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you have been stopped by the snow e Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you If you do not have blankets or extra clothing make body insulators from newspapers burlap bags rags floor mats anything you can wrap around You can run the engine to keep warm but be careful Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly
228. eight you can add to your front axle before reaching your front GAWR The front axle reserve capacity for your vehicle can be found in the lower right corner of the Certification Tire label as shown TRUCK 9 rane COLD TIRE PRESSURE XXXKPA XXPS COLD TIRE PRESSURE XXXKPA XXPSI PRESSION A FROID XXXXXXXX XXPSI E INFORMATION bo POPSI m AV FOXX T Xx United States Canada 4 53 In order to calculate the amount of weight any front accessory such as a snow plow is adding to the front axle use the following formula W x A W B W B Weight the accessory is adding to the front axle Where W Weight of added accessory A Distance that the accessory is in front of the front axle W B Vehicle Wheelbase 4 54 For example adding a 700 Ib 318 kg snow plow actually adds more than 700 lbs 318 kg to the front axle Using the formula if the snow plow is 4 ft 122 cm in front of the front axle and the wheel base is 10 ft 305 cm then W 700 Ib 318 kg A 4 ft 122 cm W B 10 ft 305 cm W x A W B W B 700 x 4 10 10 980 Ibs 445 kg So if your truck s front axle reserve capacity is more than 980 Ibs 445 kg you could add the snow plow without exceeding the front GAWR Q What if want to add heavier equipment to my vehicle A You can add heavier equipment on the front of the vehicle if you compensate for it by carrying fewer
229. ejected and the song list contains saved tracks from that CD those tracks are automatically deleted from the song list Any tracks saved to the song list again are added to the bottom of the list To end song list mode press the SONG LIST button One beep will be heard and S LIST will be removed from the display 3 88 CD Messages CHECK CD If this message appears on the display and or the CD comes out it could be for one of the following reasons e Itis very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play e You are driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smoother the CD should play e The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down e The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again e There may have been a problem while burning the CD e The label may be caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your GM dealer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your GM dealer when reporting the problem Listening to a DVD If your vehicle has the Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system and a DVD is playing the DVD symbol will appear on the radio display indicating that the DVD is available and can be listened to through your vehicle s speakers To listen to the DVD press the CD AUX button until RSE appears on the
230. elect the DIC to display information DIC Warnings and Messages Warning messages are displayed on the Driver Information Center DIC to notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some action may be needed by the driver to correct the condition If there is more than one message that needs to be displayed they will appear one after another Some messages may not require immediate action but you should press any of the four DIC buttons on the steering wheel if equipped to acknowledge that you received the messages and clear them from the display If your vehicle is not equipped with DIC buttons on the steering wheel press the trip odometer reset stem located on the instrument panel cluster to acknowledge messages and clear them from the display Some messages cannot be cleared from the display because they are more urgent These messages require action before they can be removed from the DIC display You should take any messages that appear on the display seriously and remember that clearing the messages will only make the messages disappear not correct the problem The following are the possible messages that can be displayed and some information about them BATTERY NOT CHARGING On some vehicles if the battery is not charging during operation this message will appear on the DIC Driving with this problem could drain your battery Have the electrical system checked by your GM dealer as soon as possib
231. elt force would then be applied at the abdomen not at the pelvic bones and that could cause serious or fatal injuries Be sure the belt goes under the armrests Q What is wrong with this The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which are not as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen Q What wrong with this You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer to fix it OS L2 rs NN pre A The belt is twisted across the body 1 20 To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle The belt should go back out of the way Before you close the door be sure the belt is out of the way If you slam the door on it you can damage both the belt and your vehicle Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts
232. em both the brake and ABS warning lights will come on accompanied by a 10 second chime The lights and chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on until the problem is repaired See your dealer for service Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here is what happens with ABS A computer senses that wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels The anti lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard As you brake your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember Anti lock does not change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you you will not have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even though you have anti lock brakes Using Anti Lock Do not pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti lock work for you You may feel the brakes vibrate or you may notice some noise b
233. en the LOW WASHER FLUID message is displayed you will need to add washer fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir Open the cap with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the tank is full See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for reservoir location 5 40 Notice e When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water e Do not mix water with ready to use washer fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water does not clean as well as washer fluid e Fill your washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it is very cold This allows for expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full e Do not use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage your washer system and paint Brakes Brake Fluid Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for the location of the reservoir There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear When new linings are put in the fluid level goes back up The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system If it is you should have your brake system fixed si
234. enance free battery When it is time for a new battery get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label We recommend an ACDelco replacement battery See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for battery location 5 44 Warning Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Vehicle Storage If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more remove the black negative cable from the battery This will help keep your battery from running down Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you are not careful See Jump Starting on page 5 45 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Also for your audio system see Theft Deterrent Feature on page 3 102 Jump Starting If your battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because e They contain acid that can burn you e They contain gas that can explode or ignite e They contain enough electricity to burn you If you do not follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you Notice Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to
235. ent Overview on page 5 14 for more information on its location 5 109 Replace cover after servicing r s Remettre le couvercle en place oa STUD MBEC eLower LBEC sTUD H 1 2 2 ABS VSES IGN IGN LBEC ECAS A B 1 7a a RR PARK jl LR PARK 86 INTPARK FEED rec ear OR dlo RR HVAC AUX PWR HYBRID Lemi Emn 0 C 0 Ee e Ee a air Vy ae LO am AIRBAG er O HI HOLP LT LH HID DAL 2 RVC Il IPC DIC e CIG LTR HIHDLP RT AKG COMP RR WPR II RADIO SEO B1 LO HDLP LT Lo HDLP AT f nro Fanio ame RH HID e7 mec ssa NOTE The function and amperage of these fuses FUNCTION AMP GAS FUNCTION AMP DIESEL P J REMARQUE La fonction et l intensit de FONCTION INTENSITE ESSENCE FONCTION INTENSITE DIESEL ces fusibles sont diff rentes pour les 5 110 are different for gas and INJ 2 154 EDU 25A moteurs essence et les moteurs diesel diesel fueled engines See INJ 1 154 ECMRPV 15A Voir le Guide du propri taire i pour Owners Manual i for O2A 15A FUEL HT 15A les fonctions des plots 1 et 2 functions of studs 1 and 2 O2B 15A ECMI 15A IGN 1 EDU 1 Gasoline Engine and Fuel Injection Rail 2 2 Gasoline Engine and Fuel Injection Rail 1 3 Gasoline Engine Oxygen Sensors
236. er 0 cecceeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeaes 3 15 Heated Seats oirnne unnsa e ee 1 4 Heater sitene n teeta bes a arii E 3 20 Heati ooann ennaa unnn aE E EE cated AE 3 22 Highbeam Om Light iss ccteiesteeleissenieetcceens 3 43 Highway HYPNOSIS misimisi nsee 4 37 Hill and Mountain Roads s c 4 38 HomeLink Transmitter ccccccccecceceeeeeeeeees 2 56 HomeLink Transmitter Programming 2 57 Hood Checking Things Under 0eeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 12 RECESS ccicro darnmi ani vate iaa 5 12 FOr craniana E aa dens 3 6 How to Use This Manual ce ceeeeeeeeeenee eee ees ii How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 14 Ignition POSITIONS iiien en 2 28 Infants and Young Children Restraints 1 32 Inflation Tire Pressure ccceecee eee eee eee eeee 5 67 Instrument Panel BriGhttiGSs inssin raai 3 17 Cl Ster So ise ate ccdacnececuajacdesnaucadgetioamntenminneseexcnes 3 29 OVErVICW 0 ccc eccec cece cece eee eeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeenaes 3 4 JUMP Stating cecscsvecieudeurienatgrersmaxneendvetastie 5 45 Keyless Entry System ceeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeees 2 4 KEYS inian erae tina na vedas eE 2 3 Labelling Tire Sidewall cceceeeeeeeeeees 5 62 Lamps Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp 3 17 Battery Run Down Protection a c 3 19 DOME eee a anaa 3 18 Lamps cont EXISIOR enean e E E E E Exterior Calgoo insrenianinn ia aaa
237. er Press this button again to return to the previous track or chapter This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews 3 95 1 through 0 Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad provides you with the capability of direct chapter title and track number selection lt 10 Double Digit Entries Press this button to select chapter title and track numbers greater than 9 Press this button before inputting the number RS Clear Press this button within three seconds after inputting a number to clear the number s 3 Illumination Press this button to turn the remote control backlight on The backlight will time out after about 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while the backlight is on Main DVD Menu Press this button to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the up down left and right arrow buttons to move the cursor around the DVD menu After making a selection press the enter button This button only operates when playing a DVD 1 Enter Press this button to select the choices that are highlighted in any menu Se Return Press this button to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu This button will operate only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active 3 96 E Camera Angle Press this button to change camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is playing The format and content of this f
238. er press this button to select the next CD if multiple CDs are loaded This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to a CD Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your vehicle s radio The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN If the radio is moved to a different vehicle it will not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display When the radio and vehicle are turned off the blinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK is armed With THEFTLOCK activated the radio will not operate if stolen 3 102 Audio Steering Wheel Controls Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel They include the following e OnStar Voice Recognition If your vehicle has OnStar press this button to interact with the OnStar system See the OnStar manual provided with your vehicle for more information If your vehicle does not have OnStar press this button to silence the system Press it again or any other radio button to turn on the sound PROG Program Press this button to play a station you have programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band When a CD is playing in the CD changer press this button to go to the next available CD if multiple CDs are loaded A SOURCE Press this button to switch between
239. er restriction indicator inspect the air cleaner filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after 50 000 miles 83 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information If you are driving in dusty dirty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change How to Inspect Vehicles with an Air Filter Restriction Indicator Locate the air filter restriction indicator on the engine air cleaner filter cover When the indicator turns black or is in the red orange change zone replace the filter and reset the indicator See the steps following to replace the engine air cleaner filter and to reset the air filter restriction indicator Vehicles without an Air Filter Restriction Indicator To inspect the air cleaner filter remove the engine air cleaner filter from the vehicle using the steps following When you have the engine air cleaner filter removed lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt If the engine air cleaner filter remains caked with dirt a new filter is required Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner Filter and Resetting the Air Filter Restriction Indicator 1 Locate the air cleaner filter assembly on the front corner of the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle 2 Loosen the screws on the cover of the housing and lift up the cover 5 23 Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The a
240. eres 3 37 Engine Compartment Overview 6 eeee 5 14 EXMA AUSE cisscebetatledccedacttelddimeddmncateneg aay TGE 2 44 Fan NOISG ingadangstidedcanscantaanaransidarcacemiedaiataane 5 37 Oll eves acta secant ees a meataegeeatas 5 17 Overheated Protection Operating Mode 5 32 Overheating reesen ankoran e na Enina 5 30 Starting enaere a E aaa 2 29 Entry Exit Lighting snoren 3 18 Event Data Recorders EDR acsscscscerscscrerenn 7 9 Extender Safety Belt c ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 28 Exterior Cargo Lamps ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 17 Exterior LAMPS oss ciccecsweanen scenes eetearaeds tas preeteben 3 14 Filter Engine Air Cleaner ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee siia 5 22 FINISH Damage sesno nanena 5 102 Fixed Mast Antenna cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea tees 3 104 Flash to PASS naei ER 3 9 Flat TIE ciccincscctecstavcmorsbas ea E 5 77 Flat Tire Changing cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 78 Flat Tire Stoning ecseri na ae N 5 92 Fluid Automatic Transmission ceee 5 25 Power Steering cccseceeeeeceeeeeeeeee eee eenees 5 38 Windshield Washer eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eres 5 40 Fog AMPS smirene a tanner neat 3 16 Four Wheel Drive ccceceee eee eneeeeeeees 2 35 5 50 Front Armrest Storage Area eceeeeeeeeeeeeen tees 2 60 Front AXIS sicc sc cecpitasiders eeann 5 51 UCM ne tessestsas acne tte E E T 5 5 AGCIIVGS ics ccencinccs spa ainmedmetet
241. erns when the transmission fluid temperature falls below 260 F 127 C See Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 45 for further information If your vehicle has an Allison transmission and the fluid reaches temperatures of approximately 275 F 135 C or greater the driver information center will display a TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE warning message and a chime will sound until the temperature falls below 265 F 129 C Pull the vehicle off the roadway when it is safe to do so Set the parking brake place the transmission in PARK P and allow the engine to idle until the transmission temperature falls below 265 F 129 C If the transmission continues to operate above 265 F 130 C contact your nearest dealer or the GM Roadside Assistance Center See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 Notice lf you drive your vehicle with the transmission temperature gage above normal operating range you can damage the transmission This could lead to costly repairs that would not be covered by your warranty Do not drive your vehicle while the transmission temperature gage reading is above normal See your dealer for service The following situations can cause the transmission to operate at higher temperatures e Towing a trailer e Hot outside air temperatures e Vehicle overloading e Hauling a large or heavy load e Low transmission fluid level e High transmission fluid level e Restricted air flow to the radiator and the
242. ervice work you perform See Maintenance Record on page 6 16 You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it e Be sure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If you use the wrong fasteners parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle Fuel Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of your vehicle Gasoline Octane Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or higher If the octane is less than 87 you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible Otherwise you might damage your engine A little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is considered normal This does not indicate a problem exists or that a higher octane fuel is necessary If you are using 87 octane or higher octane fuel and hear heavy knocking your engine
243. es eeeeeeeee 6 6 At Each Fuel Fill cicecciscccdccdentadhscsincwciaemevenecanes 6 9 At Least Once a Month ccccceeee seen ee 6 10 At Least Once a Year ccc cece cc ececeee sees eeeees 6 10 INTOGUCTION siise ason nr ai 6 2 Maintenance Footnotes ccceceeeseeeeeeeeneee 6 8 Maintenance Record cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 6 16 Maintenance Schedule cont Maintenance Requirements eeeeeeeee es 6 2 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 15 Owner Checks and Services eeeeeeee eee 6 9 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 13 Scheduled Maintenance cceeeeeeeeeeeee ees 6 4 USING YOUN enee atntewernoustesneedeendben metas 6 3 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2 Malfunction Indicator Light seeen 3 39 Manual Passenger Seat c eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 2 Memory Seat ic scccccdseveceie iieii a a aE 2 85 Message DIC Warnings and Messages 0 e1eeeeee 3 49 MIG ate eii irinen icai aan aE e EET 2 13 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass and Temperature Display ccccccccccceneceen 2 48 Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar Compass and Temperature Display 2 45 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb VIEW ASSISE w 2iciovwedersierceu SEE 2 53 Outside Camper Type Mirrors 0eeeeee ee 2 51 Outside Convex Mirror cceeeeeeeeeeeeneee tenes 2 52 Outsid
244. esececeeeecen 5 4 Power Steering Fluid cseseeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 38 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Windshield Washer Fluid ceeeeeeeeeeeee es 5 40 Your Vehicle sesarengan aa 5 4 BlaK Si sanatsnannntrcecutnsctacannadstcnsimeennoneistansenets 5 41 Fisi ea E 5 5 Battery a 5 44 Gasoline OCtANG aana 5 5 JUMP Starting cece eee cece aiei 5 45 Gasoline Specifications cceeeeeeeeeneeeeen tees 5 5 Real Axlescucech ie ee eh 5 49 California Fuel sees testers reteeerens 5 6 Four Wheel Drive secceecseeseeeeeeteeeeteees 5 50 AGGIIVOS sinens ccernc isinne obani 5 6 Fuel E 85 85 Ethanol 0 0ccc0cseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 7 Front Axle oies daore e astesalaeiancied 5 51 Fuels in Foreign Countries cccscceeeneeeeenes 5 9 Bulb Replacement l 5 52 Filling Your TANK sssri ieceri eienen 5 9 Halogen BUIDS eseeeteteteterteteeeteees 5 52 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 006 5 11 Headlamps cis ste acces oc cise at inan gons sens 5 53 Checking Things Under the Hood 5 12 Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Hood Release 2 0cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 5 12 Parking LAMPS esa ea tere eee tee 5 55 Engine Compartment Overview 5 14 Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Engine Qil eee ne ants ene 5 17 Daytime Running Lamps s ssssssssssseeesrees 5 56 Engine Oil Life System eeeeeeeeee eee eeee ees 5 20 Daytime Running L
245. essage still appears on the DIC Pressing any of the four DIC buttons if equipped will clear the message from the DIC display If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clear the message from the DIC display LOW COOLANT LEVEL If your vehicle has a low coolant sensor and the engine coolant level is low this message will appear on the DIC Adding coolant will clear the message See Cooling System on page 5 32 Pressing any of the four DIC buttons if equipped will clear the message from the DIC display If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clear the message from the DIC display Notice Engine damage from running your engine without coolant is not covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode in the Index for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency OIL LIFE RESET This message will appear on the display for about 10 seconds after resetting the change engine oil message See Engine Oil Life System under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 46 and Engine Oil on page 5 17 for more information OIL PRESSURE LOW If low oil pressure levels occur this message will be displayed on the DIC and a chime will sound Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been corrected Check your oil as s
246. eways and possibly roll over You could be seriously injured or killed When driving up hills always try to go straight up 4 23 Q What should do if my vehicle stalls or A is about to stall and cannot make it up the hill If this happens there are some things you should do and there are some things you must not do First here is what you should do Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards Also apply the parking brake If your engine is still running shift the transmission to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE R If your engine has stopped running you will need to restart it With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied shift the transmission to PARK P and restart the engine Then shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in REVERSE R As you are backing down the hill put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o clock position This way you will be able to tell if your wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down It is best that you back down the hill with your wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover 4 24 Here are some things you must not do if you stall or are about to stall when going up a hill Neve
247. exceed XXX kg or XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle See Towing a Trailer on page 4 62 for important information on towing a trailer towing safety rules and trailering tips 4 47 Tien 4 48 Example 1 Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 1 000 Ibs 453 kg Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 300 Ibs 136 kg 68 kg x 2 Available Occupant and Cargo Weight 700 Ibs 317 kg A Example 2 Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 68 kg x 5 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 750 Ibs 136 k
248. experience one or more of these conditions change the fuel brand you use It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off If none of the above steps have made the light turn off your dealer can check the vehicle Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Here are some things you need to know to help your vehicle pass an inspection Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on or not working properly Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This may take several days of routine driving If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness your GM dealer can prepare the vehicle f
249. f position and release it The off or AUTO mode will also cancel and the lamps will return to the AUTO when the vehicle is turned off This mode is not available for vehicles sold in Canada 3 14 AUTO Turn the control to this position to put the system into automatic headlamp mode The Daytime Running Lamps DRL will also be activated if it is light enough outside 300 Parking Lamps Turn the control to this position to turn on the parking lamps together with the following e Sidemarker Lamps e Taillamps e License Plate Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights ZD Headlamps Turn the control to this position to turn on the headlamps together with the previously listed lamps and lights When the vehicle is turned off and the headlamps are in AUTO the headlamps may automatically remain on for a set time You can change this delay time using the DIC See Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 45 You can switch your headlamps from low to high beam by pushing the turn signal multifunction lever toward the instrument panel Headlamps on Reminder If a door is open a reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on and your key is out of the ignition To turn off the chime turn the headlamp switch to off or AUTO and then back on In the AUTO mode the headlamps turn off once the ignition is in LOCK or may remain on until the headlamp delay ends if enabled in the DIC Daytime Running
250. f you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you d use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training The jack provided with your vehicle is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for changing a flat tire If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely 5 77 Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on your hazard warning flashers Changing a tire can be dangerous The veh
251. f your vehicle Use this mode to help prevent outside odors and or dust from entering your vehicle or to help cool the air inside of your vehicle more quickly Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or off The light on the recirculation button will illuminate Recirculation cannot be used in floor blend or defrost modes An indicator on the button will light up flash three times and turn off when recirculation is selected in these modes The air conditioning compressor will also come on when this mode is activated While in recirculation mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp To clear the fog select either the blend or defrost mode and increase fan speed Temperature Control Driver s Side The lever on the left side of the climate control panel is used to raise or lower the temperature on the driver s side of the vehicle This lever also adjusts the temperature to the center console outlets if equipped Passenger s Side The lever on the right side of the climate control panel is used to raise or lower the temperature on the passenger s side of the vehicle x4 Air Conditioning Press this button to turn the air conditioning system on or off When the button is pressed an indicator light will come on and the system will begin to cool and dehumidify the air inside of your vehicle You may notice a slight change in engine performance when the air conditioning compressor shuts off and turns o
252. from the radio for the Radio with Six Disc CD and XM has taken over the audio from the DVD or CD when using the wired headphones The RSE is working correctly Use the wireless headphones or have the front seat passengers listen to another audio source DVD Messages The following errors may be displayed on the video screen Disc Format Error This message will be displayed if a disc is inserted upside down if the disc is not readable or if the format is not compatible with the DVD player Load Eject Error This message will be displayed if the disc is not properly loaded or ejected Disc Play Error This message will be displayed if the DVD player cannot play the disc Scratched or damaged discs will cause this error Region Code Error This message will be displayed if the region code of the DVD is not compatible with the region code of the DVD player No Disc This message will be displayed if any of the buttons on the DVD faceplate or remote control are pressed and no disc is present in the DVD player DVD Distortion There may be an experience with audio distortion in the wireless headphones when operating cellular phones scanners CB radios Global Positioning Systems GPS two way radios mobile fax or walkie talkies It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle Excludes the OnStar System 3 99 Cleaning the Video Screen Po
253. fter an Airbag Inflates After the airbag inflates it quickly deflates so quickly that some people may not even realize the airbag inflated Some components of the airbag module will be hot for a short time These components include the steering wheel hub for the driver s frontal airbag and the instrument panel for the right front passenger s frontal airbag For vehicles with side impact airbags the side of the seatback closest to the driver s and or right front passenger s door will be hot The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There will be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle When an airbag inflates there is dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but can not get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or a door If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment you should seek medical attention In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur fro
254. g Available Cargo Example 3 Item Description Tota Vehicle Capacity Weight pA for Example 3 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 1 000 Ibs 453 kg Subtract Occupant Weight 200 lbs 91 kg x 5 Available Cargo amp iame fos ok Refer to your vehicle s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle s capacity weight and seating positions The combined weight of the driver passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle s capacity weight Certification Tire Label GAWR FRT GAWR RR COLD TIRE PRESSURE Ll I SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A vehicle specific Certification Tire label is attached to the rear edge of the driver s door The label shows the size of your vehicle s original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo 4 49 The Certification Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go toa weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear a
255. g Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Maintenance I or s Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information 7 2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 00005 7 2 Online Owner Center cccceeceeeeeeeaeeeeeees 7 3 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone MTY USENS eree inen a 7 4 Customer Assistance Offices ccccceeeeeeee 7 4 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 7 5 Roadside Assistance Program eeeeeeee ees 7 6 Courtesy Transportation ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 7 7 Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data a 0 0 0 fe 7 9 Customer Assistance and Information Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors Service Publications Ordering Information Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Chevrolet Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the fol
256. g any of the four DIC buttons if equipped will clear the message from the DIC display If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clear the message from the DIC display DIC Vehicle Customization Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that allow you to program some features to one setting based on your preference All of the customizable options listed may not be available on your vehicle Only the options available will be displayed on your Driver Information Center DIC The default settings for the customization features were set when your vehicle left the factory but may have been changed from their default state since then To change feature preferences make sure the ignition is on and the vehicle is in PARK P Press the customization button to scroll through the available customizable options After pressing the customization button VEHICLE SETTINGS will momentarily display before going to a customization option 3 58 Lock Doors Press the customization button until LOCK DOORS appears in the display To select your preference for automatic locking press the select button while LOCK DOORS is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices LOCK DOORS IN GEAR default The doors will lock when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK P LOCK DOORS WITH SPEED The doors will lock when the vehicle speed is
257. gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by your warranty To check the fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving Filling Your Tank Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others read and follow all the instructions on the pump island Turn off your engine when you are refueling Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver s side of the vehicle To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly to the left counterclockwise It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap on the last turn as you loosen it If you spill fuel and then something ignites it you could be badly burned Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way If your vehicle is a dual fuel tank chassis
258. ge not covered by your warranty COLD WEATHER GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle If you are in an area of extreme cold where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 oil Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures Engine Oil Additives Do not add anything to your oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all you will need for good performance and engine protection Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably For the oil life system to work properly you must reset the system every time the oil is changed 5 20 When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished it will indicate that an oil change is necessary A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will come on Change your oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if you are driving under the best conditions the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year However your engine oil a
259. ge to show you the selected air mode delivery The display will then show the current status of the system When the system is turned off the display will go blank after displaying the current status of the system 7s Panel This setting will deliver air to the instrument panel outlets pi Bi Level This setting will deliver warmer air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets td Floor This setting will deliver air to the floor outlets NA Defog See Defogging and Defrosting later in this section lt amp Recirculation Press this button to limit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle The light on the recirculation button will glow This is helpful when you are trying to limit odors entering your vehicle and for maximum air conditioning performance in hot weather Press this button again to allow outside air to enter the vehicle The light on the recirculation button will go off Pressing this button also cancels the auto recirculation feature To resume the auto recirculation function press the AUTO button Each time the vehicle is started the system will revert to the auto recirculation function If you select recirculation while in defrost defog or floor the light in the button will flash and then go out to let you know that this is not allowed This is normal and helps to prevent fogging 3 25 When the weather is cool or damp operating the system in recirculation for ex
260. gine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first if you add only DEX COOL extended life coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low If you have a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating on page 5 30 A 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant will e Give freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C e Give boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protect against rust and corrosion e Help keep the proper engine temperature e Let the warning lights and gages work as they should Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL may cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant may require changing sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in your vehicle 5 28 What to Use Use a mixture of one half clean drinkable water and one half DEX COOL coolant which will not damage aluminum parts If you use this coolant mixture you do not need to add anything else Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixtur
261. gine speed above normal idling speed See Engine Overheating on page 5 30 for more information FUEL LEVEL LOW If the fuel level is low this message will appear on the DIC and you will hear a chime Refuel as soon as possible Pressing any of the four DIC buttons if equipped will clear the message from the DIC display If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clear the message from the DIC display It will also clear itself after 10 seconds The low fuel light near the fuel gage will still remain on in either case See Low Fuel Warning Light on page 3 44 Fuel Gage on page 3 44 and Fuel on page 5 5 3 52 KEYFOB X BATTERY LOW If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low this message will appear on the DIC The battery needs to be replaced in the transmitter See Battery Replacement under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2 5 Pressing any of the four DIC buttons if equipped will clear the message from the DIC display If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clear the message from the DIC display LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR If the driver s side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear this message will appear on the display and you will hear a chime Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstacles and close the door again Check to see if the m
262. go Weight Rating CWR CWR is the maximum weight of the load your vehicle can carry It doesn t include the weight of the people inside But you can figure about 150 Ibs 68 kg for each seat The total cargo load must not be more than your vehicle s CWR Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached so that you won t go over the GVWR or GAWR If you are using a weight distributing hitch weigh the vehicle without the spring bars in place You ll get the best performance if you spread out the weight of your load the right way and if you choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes For more information see Towing a Trailer on page 4 62 4 61 Towing a Trailer Do not tow a trailer during break in See New Vehicle Break In on page 2 28 for more information If you do not use the correct equipment and drive properly you can lose control when you pull a trailer For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all You and your passengers could be seriously injured Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle 4 62 Notice Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this part and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with yo
263. h The threshold level can vary however with specific vehicle design so that it can be somewhat above or below this range 1 54 Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds For example e If the vehicle hits a stationary object the airbag could inflate at a different crash speed than if the object were moving e If the object deforms the airbag could inflate at a different crash speed than if the object does not deform e If the vehicle hits a narrow object like a pole the airbag could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object like a wall e If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the airbag could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object The frontal airbags driver and right front passenger are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers rear impacts or in many side impacts because inflation would not likely help the occupants Vehicles with dual stage airbags are also equipped with special sensors which enable the sensing system to monitor the position of both the driver and passenger front seats The seat position sensor provides information which is used to determine if the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment Your vehicle may or may not have a side impact airbag See Airbag System on page 1 49 Side impact airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes A side impact airbag
264. h which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body S GAAT ANY ON SY The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash 1 25 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for small adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide better positions the belt away from the neck and head There is one guide for each passenger position in the rear seat 1 26 Here is how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt 1 Remove the guide from the storage clip on the side of the rear seatback 2 Place the guide over the belt and insert the 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide The guide must be on top of the be
265. h slowly at first and then rapidly Proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink to complete Using HomeLink Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink button for at least half of a second The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted Erasing HomeLink Buttons To erase programming from the three buttons do the following 1 Press and hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer than 30 seconds 2 Release both buttons HomeLink is now in the train learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2 under Programming HomeLink shown earlier in this section Individual buttons cannot be erased but they can be reprogrammed See Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button following this section Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button Do not release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds While still holding the HomeLink button proceed with Step 2 under Programming HomeLink shown earlier in this section 2 59 Resetting Defaults To reset HomeLink to default settings do the following 1 Hold down the two outside buttons for about 20 seconds until the indicator lig
266. harder to open If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over you will be right in its path If you have to walk down the slope stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over 4 28 Getting out on the downhill low side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous If the vehicle rolls over you could be crushed or killed Always get out on the uphill high side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path Driving in Mud Sand Snow or Ice When you drive in mud snow or sand your wheels will not get good traction You cannot accelerate as quickly turning is more difficult and you will need longer braking distances It s best to use a low gear when you are in mud the deeper the mud the lower the gear In really deep mud the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do not get stuck When you drive on sand you will sense a change in wheel traction But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is On loosely packed sand such as on beaches or sand dunes your tires will tend to sink into the sand This has an effect on steering accelerating and braking Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction On these surfaces it is very easy to lose control On wet ice for example the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating And if you do get movi
267. he DIC display SERVICE RIDE CONTROL If a problem occurs with the suspension system this message will appear on the DIC If this message appears stop and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the suspension system needs service See your GM dealer SERVICE STABILITY If you ever see the SERVICE STABILITY message it means there may be a problem with your StabiliTrak system If you see this message try to reset the system Stop turn off the engine then start the engine again If the SERVICE STABILITY message still comes on it means there is a problem You should see your GM dealer for service The vehicle is safe to drive however you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak so reduce your speed and drive accordingly For more information on the StabiliTrak system see StabiliTrak System on page 4 10 STABILITY SYS ACTIVE You may see the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message on the DIC It means that an advanced computer controlled system has come on to help your vehicle continue to go in the direction in which you are steering For more information on the StabiliTrak system see StabiliTrak System on page 4 10 3 55 STABILITY SYS DISABLED The STABILITY SYS DISABLED message will turn on when you press the StabiliTrak button or when the stability control has been automatically disabled Ther
268. he accelerator pedal and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The starter should work only in PARK P or NEUTRAL N If the starter works in any other position contact your GM Goodwrench dealer for service Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle It should be parked on a level surface 2 Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 2 40 if necessary Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move 3 With the engine off turn the ignition to RUN but do not start the engine Without applying the regular brake try to move the shift lever out of PARK P with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of PARK P contact your GM Goodwrench dealer for service Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position e The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK P e The key should come out only in LOCK Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is required Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission Park P Mechanism Check When you are doing this check your vehicle could begin to
269. he chime volume level will change from the normal level to loud and LOUD will appear on the radio display To change back to the default or normal setting press and hold pushbutton 6 again The chime level will change from the loud level to normal and NORMAL will appear on the radio display Each time the chime volume is changed three chimes will sound as an example of the new volume selected Removing the radio and not replacing it with a factory radio or chime module will disable vehicle chimes Section 4 Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle 4 2 Defensive Driving ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Drunken Driving isinsin reins senna aibes in 4 2 Control of a Vehicle cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee een eees 4 5 Braking senvenena AE E EOE 4 5 Anti Lock Brake System ABS o ae 4 6 Braking in Emergencies seeeeeeeeenee eee ees 4 8 Traction Assist System TAS eceeeeeeeeeeee 4 8 Locking Rear Axle 0 cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 10 StabiliTrak System siirsin 4 10 StCeCring arrien iena a een eee een aine 4 13 Off Road ReCOVErY cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee naeted 4 15 PASSING enpa bicntans E a E gna s 4 15 Loss Of Control beices craniana nni 4 17 Off Road Driving with Your Four Wheel Drive NGNICIC esc sicccasecssdeGzcaanaseelginaveanoanansetceenceies 4 18 Driving at NIGHT wisccceststcnceess oc ke sirane ence 4 30 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
270. he jack cover and tighten the jack cover wingnuts Spare Tire Your vehicle when new had a fully inflated spare tire A spare tire may lose air over time so check its inflation pressure regularly See nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 67 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle For instruction on how to remove install or store a spare tire see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5 82 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 92 After installing the spare tire on your vehicle you should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is correctly inflated Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed back onto your vehicle This way a spare tire will be available in case you need it again Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than the road tires those originally installed on your vehicle This spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle so it is all right to drive on it If your vehicle has four wheel drive and the smaller spare is installed keep the vehicle in two wheel drive as much as possible If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not match your vehicle s original road tires and wheels in size and type do not include the spare in the tire rotation Appearance Care Cleaning products can be hazardous Some are toxic Other cleaning products ca
271. he outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 TC or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service i Drain flush and refill cooling system This service can be complex you should have your dealer perform this service See Engine Coolant on page 5 28 for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and filler neck Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap j A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired and the fluid level checked Add fluid if needed k Inspect system Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook up routing and condition Check that the purge valve works properly if equipped Replace as needed I If you drive regularly under dusty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change Owner Checks and Services These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you with these checks and services Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 At Each Fuel Fill It is importan
272. he pedals are located on the driver s side door panel Press the button closest to you to move the pedals closer to you Press the button farthest from you to move the pedals away from you Engine Coolant Heater Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine coolant heater In very cold weather 0 F 18 C or colder the engine coolant heater can help You will get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up Usually the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle At temperatures above 32 F 0 C use of the coolant heater is not required Your vehicle may also have an internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord This will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater when the temperature is at or above 0 F 18 C as noted on the cord To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord The cord is located on the driver s side of the engine compartment near the power steering fluid reservoir 3 Plug it into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord will not reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 a
273. he rear tires to the recommended cold tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information Label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 5 69 Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be rotated every 5 000 to 8 000 miles 8 000 to 13 000 km Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 71 and Wheel Replacement on page 5 74 for more information Make sure the spare tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves use the ratchet wheel wrench to tighten the cable See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 78 The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle The first rotation is the most important See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 5 70 When rotating your tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here Do not include the spare tire in your tire rotation After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the tire and loading information label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 67 for more information Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifications on page 5 114 Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fasten
274. he repairs would not be covered by your warranty Check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible to the accessory power outlets and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses If you experience a problem see your dealer for additional information on the accessory power plugs Notice Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter If your vehicle has this feature it is located in the center console or on the instrument panel Pull up on the ashtray door to open it if it is in the console or pull the door open it if it is on the instrument panel Notice lf you put papers or other flammable items in the ashtray hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage your vehicle Never put flammable items in the ashtray To remove the ashtray pull it out from the console or from the slide out door To reinstall the ashtray slide it back to the original position To use the cigarette lighter if equipped push it in all the way and let go When it s ready it will pop back out by itself Notice Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating will not allow the lighter to back away from the heating element when it is hot Damage fr
275. her the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle 4 46 Tire and Loading Information Label SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL FRONT CEN TOTAL SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL FRONT CEN MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Label Example A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar B pillar With the driver s door open you will find the label attached below the door lock post striker The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions A and the maximum vehicle capacity weight B in kilograms and pounds The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires C and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures D For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5 61 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 67 There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification Tire label It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for the front and rear axles See Certification Tire Label later in this section Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never
276. hicle anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the restraints Some restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top tether strap A Lower Anchorage B Lower Anchorage C Top Tether 1 41 A Lower Anchorage B Lower Anchorage In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle you need a child restraint designed for that system To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child restraint system each seating position with the LATCH system has a visible metal anchorage point in the seat where the seatback meets the seat cushion 1 42 If a LATCH type child restraint is not attached to its anchorage points the restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly Ina crash the child could be seriously injured or killed Make sure that a LATCH type child restraint is properly installed using the anchorage points or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System 1 Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating position you want to use where the bottom of the seatback meets the back of the seat cushion See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children LATCH System on page 1 41 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 3 Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
277. his button to turn the system on or off The rear speakers will be muted when the power is turned on unless your vehicle is equipped with the Bose audio system Volume Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume The left knob controls the left headphones and the right knob controls the right headphones SRC Source Press this button to select a source radio CDs or DVDs V SEEK A When listening to FM1 FM2 or AM press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio When a CD is playing press the up arrow to go to the next track on the CD Press the down arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to a CD PROG Program Press this button to go to the next preset radio station set on the pushbuttons on the main radio This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio 3 101 When a cassette tape is playing press this button to go to the other side of the tape This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to a cassette tape When a CD is playing press this button to go to the beginning of the CD This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to a CD When a CD is playing in the six disc CD chang
278. hoist shaft E The ribbed square end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire Turn the wheel wrench H counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground Continue to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle If the spare tire does not lower to the ground the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to lower See Secondary Latch System on page 5 89 5 81 5 The wheel wrench has Removing the Flat Tire and a hook that allows you to pull the hoist Installing the Spare Tire cable towards you to he followi assist in reaching Use the following pictures and instructions to remove the spare tire the flat tire and raise the vehicle 6 When the tire has been lowered tilt the retainer D at the end of the cable so it can be pulled up through the wheel opening The tools you ll be using include the bottle jack A the wheel blocks B the jack handle C the jack handle extensions D and the wheel wrench E 7 Put the spare tire near the flat tire 5 82 1 If your vehicle has wheel nut caps loosen them by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise If the vehicle has a center cap with wheel nut caps the wheel nut caps are designed to stay with the center cap after they are loosened Remove the entire center cap Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loose
279. ht begins to flash 2 Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink indicator light turns off 3 Release both buttons For questions or comments contact HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www homelink com Storage Areas Glove Box Open the glove box by pulling the bottom of the handle upward 2 60 Center Overhead Console Your vehicle may have an overhead console equipped with reading lights and a small storage area Press the button next to the light to turn it on Press it again to turn it off Front Armrest Storage Area Your vehicle may have a center armrest storage compartment in the front bench seat To open it fold down the armrest and press the latch handle located at the front of the armrest Then let the lid pop up and swing open Center Console Storage Area Your vehicle may have a console compartment with cupholders between the bucket seats To open it press the button and swing the console lid open The rear of the console has a cupholder that swings down for the rear seat passenger to use Luggage Carrier You can load things on top of your vehicle if it has this feature The luggage carrier has slats and siderails attached to the roof and may have crossrails which can be moved back and forth to help secure cargo Tie the load to the siderails or siderail supports Notice Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that weighs more than 200 Ibs 91 kg or hangs over the
280. icle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people You and they could be badly injured or even killed Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving Set the parking brake firmly Put the shift lever in PARK P If you have a four wheel drive vehicle be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised CAUTION Continued 5 78 5 Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle 6 Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side at the opposite end of the vehicle CSS p The following information will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The jack and the wheel blocks are located under a cover near the passenger side rear seat To remove the jack and wheel blocks do the following Rear seat passenger side jack cover A Wheel Blocks E Jack 1 Remove the jack cover by turning the two wing nuts B Knob F Jack Head one quarter turn counterclockwise and pulling the C Wing Nut G Mounting Bracket jack cover off D Retaining Hook Release the jack E from the mounting bracket G by turning the knob B on the jack counterclockwise to lower the jack head F from the mounting bracket 3 Remove the wheel blocks A at
281. icles first sold in Canada For vehicles first sold in Canada you can turn off the automatic headlamp system when parked at night by applying the parking brake before starting your vehicle The headlamps will remain off once the vehicle is started for as long as you are parked If you release the parking brake the lights will turn on If the parking brake is not released before you begin to drive the exterior lamps will turn on above 2 mph 3 2 km h 3 15 Your vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the instrument panel Be sure it is not covered or the system will be on whenever the ignition is on The system may also turn on your headlamps when driving through a parking garage heavy overcast weather or a tunnel This is normal There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps DRL and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the system The DRL and automatic headlamp system will only be affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay If you start your vehicle in a dark garage the automatic headlamp system will come on immediately Once you leave the garage it will take approximately one minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light outside During that delay your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual
282. ide impact airbag is in the side of the passenger s seatback closest to the door 1 53 When Should an Airbag Inflate The driver s and right front passenger s frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes But they are designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold Deployment thresholds take into account a variety of desired deployment and non deployment events and are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling It depends largely on what you hit the direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down In addition your vehicle has dual stage frontal airbags which adjust the restraint according to crash severity Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate and a more severe frontal impact For moderate frontal impacts these airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment For more severe frontal impacts full deployment occurs If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not move or deform the threshold level for the reduced deployment is about 10 to 16 mph 16 to 25 km h and the threshold level for a full deployment is about 20 to 30 mph 32 to 48 km
283. ilable at this time on this not available channel The system is working properly 3 71 XM Radio Messages cont d Radio Display No Info Category Name No category information is available at this time on this not available channel The system is working properly No Info No Text Informational No text or informational messages are available at this time message available on this channel The system is working properly Not Found No channel available for There are no channels available for the selected category the chosen category The system is working properly XM Locked Theft lock active The XM receiver in the vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If this message is received after having your vehicle serviced check with your GM dealer Radio ID Radio ID label If tuned to channel 0 this message will alternate with the channel 0 XM Radio eight digit radio ID label This label is needed to activate the service Unknown Radio ID not known If this message is received when tuned to channel 0 there should only be if may be a receiver fault Consult with your GM dealer hardware failure Chk XMRevr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver may have a fault Consult with your GM dealer 3 72 Playing a CD Insert a CD part way into the slot label side up The player will pull it
284. improperly If this happens contact the radio station While the radio is tuned to an RDS station the station name or call letters will appear on the display instead of the frequency RDS stations may also provide the time of day a program type PTY for current programming and the name of the program being broadcast 3 76 XM Satellite Radio Service XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States XM offers 100 coast to coast channels including music news sports talk and children s programming XM provides digital quality audio and text information that includes song title and artist name A service fee is required in order to receive the XM service For more information contact XM at www xmradio com or call 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 Playing the Radio PWR Power Push this knob to turn the system on and off lt 1 VOLUME gt Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume INFO Information Press this knob to switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time When the ignition is off press this knob to display the time For RDS press the INFO knob to change what appears on the display while using RDS The display options are station name RDS station frequency PTY and the name of the program if available For XM if equipped press the INFO knob while in XM mode to retrieve four different categories of information relat
285. in and the CD should begin playing If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off first press the eject button or the INFO knob If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the player it will stay in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD will start playing where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source When a CD is inserted the CD symbol will appear on the display As each new track starts to play the track number will appear on the display The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner If playing a CD R the sound quality may be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled There may be an increase in skipping difficulty in finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur try a known good CD Do not add paper labels to CDs they could get caught in the CD player If an error appears on the display see CD Messages later in this section 1 PREV Previous Press this pushbutton to go to the beginning of the current track if more than eight seconds have played TRACK and the track number will appear on the display If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than once the player will continue moving backward through the CD 2 NEXT Press this p
286. in dim light and are not even aware of it 4 31 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ML GA yl Mi ra f nity z NS Me sa rE jiy T HN Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble On a wet road you cannot stop accelerate or turn as well because your tire to road traction is not as good as on dry roads And if your tires do not have much tread left you will get even less traction It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement 4 32 The heavier the rain the harder it is to see Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals pavement markings the edge of the road and even people walking It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems too The water may affect your brakes Try to avoid puddles But if you cannot try to slow down before you hit them Wet brakes can cause accidents They will not work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one
287. ing 2 With the tonneau cover rolled up place it in the proper compartment in the bag and zip the bag shut 1 Attach the bag to the cargo tie downs as shown Unzip the top of the storage bag 2 Remove the two bows by gently pushing them against the spring loaded end Set the bow aside Removing the Front Rear Rails and Bows Before moving on to the next step you will want to attach the storage bag to the cargo tie downs if it is not already attached so you will have a place ready to store the front and back rails and the two bows 3 With the midgate lowered enter the rear passenger compartment of the vehicle See Midgate on page 2 13 1 Remove the rear rail by pulling it straight out from the side rails Set the rail aside 2 82 4 Remove the front rail by first twisting up the edge nearest you to clear the midgate seals and then pulling it out from the side rails 5 Stow both bows and the front and rear rails in the storage bag When all components of the tonneau cover are secured in the bag properly zip the bag shut Reverse the procedure to reinstall the tonneau cover using the following suggestions e When reinstalling the front rail start by holding the back edge of the rail up and then twisting the back edge down while pushing it into place e Both bows are the same size and therefore interchangeable e When placing the bows in the side rails it is easiest to place the spring loaded
288. ing the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you will be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash Q What is wrong with this A The shoulder belt is too loose It will not give nearly as much protection this way You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body Q What is wrong with this A The belt is buckled in the wrong place You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you Q What is wrong with this The belt is over an armrest You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this The belt would be much too high In a crash you can slide under the belt The b
289. inually updated each time you drive Engine Oil Life System Press the fuel information button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears on the display The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil s remaining useful life It will show 100 when the system is reset after an oil change It will alert you to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil change To reset the engine oil life system use the fuel button to reach the ENGINE OIL LIFE screen and then press and hold the select button for five seconds while ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed OIL LIFE 3 48 RESET will appear on the display for 10 seconds to let you know the system is reset See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 20 for more information In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual See Engine Oil on page 5 17 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 Customization Button i Customization Press the customization button to access the VEHICLE SETTINGS menu and customize the settings to your vehicle See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 58 for more information Select Button 1 Select Press the select button to reset certain DIC functions and set your customization settings For example this button will reset the trip odometers and scroll through the languages in which you can s
290. involved it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in programming the transmitter Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming It is also recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed HomeLink buttons should be erased for security purposes Refer to Erasing HomeLink Buttons or for assistance contact HomeLink on the Internet at www homelink com or by calling 1 800 355 3515 Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate operator you are programming When programming a garage door it is advised to park outside of the garage It is recommended that a new battery be installed in your hand held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio frequency Programming HomeLink Your vehicle s engine should be turned off while programming the transmitter Follow these steps to program up to three channels 1 Press and hold down the two outside buttons releasing only when the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not hold down the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program a second and or third transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink buttons 2 Position the end of your hand held transmitter about 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the indicator light in view 2 57 3 Simultaneously press an
291. ir cleaner not only cleans the air it helps to stop flame if the engine backfires If it is not there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off 3 Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible 4 Clean the engine air cleaner filter sealing surfaces and the housing 5 Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter 6 Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws 7 Reset the air filter restriction indicator if equipped by pressing the top button on the indicator 5 24 Automatic Transmission Fluid When to Check and Change A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed Change both the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions e In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher e In hilly or mountainous terrain e When doing frequent trailer towing e Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 100 000 miles 166 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at the dea
292. ires at the recommended pressure a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions Worn old tires can cause accidents If your about your tire warranty and where to obtain service tread is badly worn or if your tires have see your GM Warranty booklet for details For additional been damaged replace them information refer to the tire manufacturer s booklet included with your vehicle s Owner s Manual 5 61 Tire Sidewall Labelling Useful information about a tire is molded into the sidewall The following illustrations are examples of a typical P Metric and a LT Metric tire sidewall qnel75Rig 7 gS DOT MALGAge ge ww Passenger P Metric Tire A Tire Size The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more detail 5 62 B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards D Tire Identification Number TIN The lette
293. is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any anti lock brake system ABS helps avoid only the braking skid Off Road Driving with Your Four Wheel Drive Vehicle This off road guide is for vehicles that have four wheel drive Also see Braking on page 4 5 If your vehicle does not have four wheel drive you should not drive off road unless you are on a level solid surface Off road driving can be great fun But it does have some definite hazards The greatest of these is the terrain itself Off roading means you have left the great North American road system behind Traffic lanes are not marked Curves are not banked There are no road signs Surfaces can be slippery rough uphill or downhill In short you have gone right
294. it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specifications TPC Spec number on each tire s sidewall When you get new tires GM recommends that you get tires with that same TPC Spec number That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance handling speed rating load range traction ride tire pressure monitoring system performance and other things during normal service on your vehicle If your tires have an all season tread design the TPC number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow Whenever you replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type bias bias belted or radial as your original tires If you replace your vehicle s tires with those not having a TPC Spec number the tire pressure monitoring system may give an inaccurate low pressure warning Non TPC Spec tires may give a low pressure warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you would get with TPC Spec numbered tires 5 72 Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels Your vehicle may be equipped with a different s
295. ive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels Notice Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only Use chrome polish only on chrome plated wheels but avoid any painted surface of the wheel and buff off immediately after application Notice lf you drive your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes you could damage the aluminum or chrome plated wheels The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum or chrome plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels 5 101 Tires To clean the tires use a stiff brush with tire cleaner Notice Using petroleum based tire dressing products on your vehicle may damage the paint finish and or tires When applying a tire dressing always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on your vehicle Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection
296. ivery mode and fan speed After the five second update the display will change to show the temperature setting both arrows and AUTO If the drivers and passenger s temperature settings are not the same the opposite side temperature setting will be displayed for an additional five seconds To make the passenger s temperature the same as the driver s press and hold the AUTO button for about four seconds When auto is selected the air conditioning operation and air inlet will be automatically controlled The air conditioning compressor will run when the 3 24 outside temperature is over about 40 F 4 C The air inlet will normally be set to outside air If it s hot outside the air inlet may automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help quickly cool down your vehicle The light on the button will illuminate in recirculation Set the driver s and passenger s temperature To find your comfort setting start with a 74 F 23 C temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate Turn the driver s or passenger s side temperature knob to adjust the temperature setting as necessary If you choose the temperature setting of 60 F 15 C the system will remain at the maximum cooling setting If you choose the temperature setting of 90 F 32 C the system will remain at the maximum heat setting Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the vehicle to heat or cool any faster Be ca
297. iving If you need more power for passing and you are e Going less than about 35 mph 55 km h push your accelerator pedal about halfway down e Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down You will shift down to the next gear and have more power 2 33 DRIVE D can be used when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or for off road driving You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often THIRD 3 This position is also used for normal driving however it offers more power and lower fuel economy than DRIVE D SECOND 2 This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy You can use SECOND 2 on hills It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on If you manually select SECOND 2 the transmission will drive in second gear You may use this feature for reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces Once the vehicle is moving shift into DRIVE D 2 34 FIRST 1 This position gives you even more power but lower fuel economy than SECOND 2 You can use it on very steep hills or in deep snow or mud If the shift lever is put in FIRST 1 while the vehicle is moving forward the transmission will not shift into firs
298. ize spare than the road tires those originally installed on your vehicle When new your vehicle included a spare tire and wheel assembly with a similar overall diameter as your vehicle s road tires and wheels so it is all right to drive on it Because this spare was developed for use on your vehicle it will not affect vehicle handling If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
299. k If either arrow is held or pressed more than once the player will continue moving backward or forward through the CD Ki SCAN PC Press and hold either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep The radio will go to the next track play for 10 seconds then go on to the next track Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows again to stop scanning 3 74 INFO Information Press this knob to see how long the current track has been playing ET and the elapsed time will appear on the display To change the default on the display track or elapsed time press the knob until you see the display you want then hold the knob for two seconds The radio will produce one beep and the selected display will now be the default BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The inactive CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio The inactive CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening A Eject Press this button to stop a CD when it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio off CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first CD Messages If the CD comes out it could be for one of the following reasons e It is very hot When the tempera
300. l you hear a click 9 Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle The DRLs are located in the front fascia near the foglamps They can be identified by their square shape 1 Reach under the front fascia and locate the DRL housing Be sure you are not picking the foglamp housing which is near the DRLs 2 Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the DRL housing 3 Pull out the old bulb from the socket and put a new bulb in 4 Place the bulb socket back into the DRL housing and turn it clockwise until it is tight 5 58 2 Remove the two rear lamp assembly screws near the tailgate latch and pull out the lamp assembly A Stoplamp B Turn Signal Lamp C Back up Lamp 3 Press the release tab and turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the taillamp housing To replace taillamp bulb do the following 1 Open the tailgate See Tailgate on page 2 22 for more information 4 Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket 5 59 5 Press a new bulb into the socket and turn the Windshield Wiper Blade socket clockwise into the taillamp housing until it clicks Replacement 6 fala the rear lamp assembly and tighten Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least the screws twice a year for wear and cracking See Scheduled 7 Close the tailgate Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information Replacement blades come in different types and are Replacement Bul
301. lass 2 Squeeze and pull down the latch levers A located near the upper corners of the rear glass to unlatch Once unlatched the glass catch release button C will catch the rear glass and prevent it from falling forward 3 While holding the rear glass in place press the glass catch release button C and pull the top of the rear glass toward you using the grab handle s B located at the top of the rear glass 4 With the rear glass tilted toward you lift it out from the lower window frame channel Use the grab handles to assist you in removing the rear glass 5 Load the rear glass into the storage pocket in the midgate guiding the lower edge of the rear glass behind the three rear glass retaining tabs E Hold the rear glass flat against the storage pocket with grab handles facing you until the next step 6 Turn both glass lock knobs D located at both top corners of the storage pocket to the locked position Push in on the corner of the rear glass to allow the lock knob to engage more easily Once both glass lock knobs are in the locked position the rear glass is securely stored Push both latch levers up to the locked position You should hear a click when each latch lever locks correctly The rear seats can be returned to the normal position when the rear glass is out and stored properly in the storage pocket Reinstalling the Rear Glass To reinstall the rear glass do the following
302. le 0 cseeeeeeeeeees 6 2 Owner Checks and Services 6 9 IMMOGUCHON sense tes cece cecne eed dacudhaelsibdeues dan sek deacons 6 2 At Each Fuel Pill onic ccecc ectcetiaeeanetacsndnenesneekdeed 6 9 Maintenance Requirements eceeeeeeeeeee 6 2 At Least Once a Month cceeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 6 10 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2 At Least Once a Year acesse 6 10 Using Your Maintenance Schedule 6 3 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 13 Scheduled Maintenance cseeeeeeeneeeeen tees 6 4 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 15 Additional Required Services eeeeeeee eee 6 6 Maintenance Record ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 16 Maintenance Footnotes ccceeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 6 8 6 1 Maintenance Schedule Introduction Important Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer for details Maintenance Requirements Notice Maintenance intervals checks inspections replacement parts and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered
303. le Pressing any of the four DIC buttons if equipped will clear the message from the DIC display If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clear the message from the DIC display See Charging System Light on page 3 33 and Voltmeter Gage on page 3 34 BUCKLE PASSENGER If your vehicle is equipped with the passenger sensing system this message reminds you to buckle the passenger s seat belt See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 58 This message will display and a chime will sound when the ignition is on the driver s seat belt is buckled the passenger s seat belt is unbuckled with the passenger airbag enabled and the vehicle is in motion You should have the passenger buckle their seat belt 3 49 This reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on the vehicle is in motion the driver is buckled and the passenger is still unbuckled and the passenger airbag is enabled If the passenger s seat belt is already buckled this message and chime will not come on Pressing any of the four DIC buttons if equipped will acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC display If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC display BUCKLE SEATBELT If your vehicle is equipped with the passenger sensing system this message reminds you to buckle the driver s seat
304. leration have to do their work where the tires meet the road Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places You can lose control See Traction Assist System TAS on page 4 8 What should you do if this ever happens Ease up on the accelerator pedal steer the vehicle the way you want it to go and slow down Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed Of course the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions Under less favorable conditions you will want to go slower If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve do it before you enter the curve while your front wheels are straight ahead Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you You can avoid these problems by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you cannot there is not room That is the time for evasive action steering around the problem Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply your brakes See Braking on
305. lership service department If you do it yourself be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick Notice Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine part or exhaust system parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving e When outside temperatures are above 90 F 32 C e At high speed for quite a while e In heavy traffic especially in hot weather e While pulling a trailer 5 25 To get the right reading the fluid should be at normal operating temperature which is 180 F to 200 F 82 C to 93 C Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles 24 km when outside temperatures are above 50 F 10 C If it is colder than 50 F 10 C drive the vehicle in THIRD 3 until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off but this is used only as a reference Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50 F 10 C or more If it is colder than 50 F 10 C you may have to idle the engine longer Should
306. lly important to a safe trouble free trip Is the tread good enough for long distance driving Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure e Weather Forecasts What is the weather outlook along your route Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system e Maps Do you have up to date maps Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel Call it highway hypnosis lack of awareness or whatever There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery along with the hum of the tires on the road the drone of the engine and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy Do not let it happen to you If it does your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second and you could crash and be injured What can you do about highway hypnosis First be aware that it can happen Then here are some tips e Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated with a comfortably cool interior e Keep your eyes moving Scan the road ahead and to the sides Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently e If you get sleepy pull off the road into a rest service or parking area and take a nap get some exercise or both For safety treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency 4 37 Hill and Mountain Roads If you drive regularly in steep country or if you are planning to visit there here are
307. lock safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 44 5 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor If you are using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 6 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position Do not use child restraints in this position The restraints will not work properly Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 38 In addition your vehicle may have the passenger sensing system The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger s frontal air bag when an infant in a rear facing infant seat or a small child in a forward facing child restraint or booster seat is detected See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 58 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 32 for mo
308. locked into the siderail Your vehicle has a Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL located above the rear glass If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle care should be taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit Rear Storage Area Your vehicle is equipped with a rear armrest cupholder for the rear seat passengers To open it pull up and then out on the tab located at the top center of the armrest and pull the armrest down 2 61 Cargo Cover Panels A CAUTION Improperly stored cargo cover panels could be thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver You or others could be injured If you remove a panel always store it in the proper storage location When you put it back always be sure that is securely reattached Notice Exceeding the weight limit of 250 Ibs 113 kg can damage the cargo covers and the repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not put anything on top of the cargo covers over the weight limit Your vehicle may be equipped with a three piece cargo cover system The cargo panels can be removed and stored in the cargo area of the vehicle with the cargo panel storage bag To remove a cargo panel s do the following 1 Lower the tailgate Use the ignition door key to unlock the tailgate if it is locked See Tailgate on page 2 22 for more information on the tailgate 2 62 Before removing the cargo panel s notice the numbers embossed on the upper center
309. lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often e g under heavy loads and or hilly conditions You may also want to activate the tow haul mode if the transmission shifts too often See Tow Haul Mode earlier in this section When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades consider the following Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes If you turn your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades your vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating To avoid this let the engine run while parked preferably on level ground with the automatic transmission in PARK P for a few minutes before turning the engine off If you do get the overheat warning see Engine Overheating on page 5 30 4 70 Parking on Hills You really should not park your vehicle with a trailer attached on a hill If something goes wrong your rig could start to move People can be injured and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill here s how to do it 1 Apply your regular brakes but don t shift into PARK P yet Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load Reapply the regular brakes Then apply your parking brake and shift into PARK P If you have a four wheel drive
310. lowing steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling 1 800 222 1020 In Canada contact GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre by calling 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French 7 2 We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative e Vehicle Identification Number VIN This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield e Dealership name and location e Vehicle delivery date and present mileage kilometers When contacting Chevrolet please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern STEP THREE Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if yo
311. ls requires good judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle can and cannot do There are some hills that simply cannot be driven no matter how well built the vehicle Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you will stall If you drive down them you cannot control your speed If you drive across them you will roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness do not drive the hill Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill you need to decide if it is one of those hills that is just too steep to climb descend or cross Steepness can be hard to judge On a very small hill for example there may be a smooth constant 4 22 incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top On a large hill the incline may get steeper as you near the top but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes grass or shrubs Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill e Is there a constant incline or does the hill get sharply steeper in places e Is there good traction on the hillside or will the surface cause tire slipping e Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you will not have to make turning maneuvers e Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path such as boulders trees logs or ruts e What is beyond the hill Is there a cliff
312. lt 1 27 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1 23 Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guides squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guides Attach the guide onto the storage clip 1 28 Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt is not long enough your dealer will order you an extender It is free When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you To help avoid personal injury do not let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit The extender has been designed for adults Never use it for securing child seats To wear it just attach it to the regular safety belt For more information see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender Child Restraints Q What is the proper way to wear safety belts A If possible an older child should wear a Older Children lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash Accident statistics show that childre
313. lt A You could be whether you are wearing a safety belt or not But you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you are upside down And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted Q If my vehicle has airbags why should I have to wear safety belts or the safety belts A Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future But they are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Every airbag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags you still have to buckle up to get the most protection That is true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That is why safety belts make such good sense Q If am a good driver and I never drive far from home why should wear safety belts A You may be an excellent driver but if you are in an accident even one that is not your fault you and your passengers can be hurt Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occ
314. m operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment At times you may notice a decrease in range This is normal for any remote keyless entry system If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work try this e Check the distance You may be too far from your vehicle You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather e Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again e Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary See Battery Replacement under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2
315. m the right front passenger airbag e Airbags are designed to inflate only once After an airbag inflates you will need some new parts for your airbag system If you do not get them the air bag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts e Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash See Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders on page 7 9 e Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag system Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly See your dealer for service Notice If you damage the covering for the driver s or the right front passenger s airbag or the airbag covering on the driver s and right front passenger s seatback the airbag may not work properly You may have to replace the airbag module in the steering wheel both the airbag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger s airbag or both the airbag module and seatback for the driver s and right front passenger s side impact airbag Do not open or break the airbag coverings 1 57 Passenger Sensing System If your rearview mirror has one of the indicators pictured in the following illustrations your vehicle has a passenger sensing system The indicator will be visibl
316. ment Panel Fuse Block 5 108 Seg et a Underhood Fuse Block ccccccesssseeeeeeeees 5 109 Weatherstips oa ITTTS9a Capacities and Specifications nnn 5 114 Service Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it We hope you will go to your dealer for all your service needs You will get genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACVelco E parts GM Goodwrench E Accessories California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles including this one contain and or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Engine exhaust many parts and systems including some inside the vehicle many fluids and some component wear by products contain and or emit these chemicals Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do some of your own service work you will want to use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 11 Your vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 62 You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any s
317. move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake e To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL N slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only e To check the PARK P mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to PARK P Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is required Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect Recommended Fluids and Usage Fluid Lubricant j Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or Lubricants equivalent DOT 3 brake fluid Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part Windshield number or specification may be obtained from your Washer Solvent GM Optikleen Washer Solvent dealer f GM Power Steering Fluid Power Steering GM Part No U S 89021184 in essa EIEE y Canada 89021186 Ue UDT can DEXRON III Automatic
318. mps 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you do not it could be damaged How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in The answer depends on the outside temperature the kind of oil you have and some other things Instead of trying to list everything here we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you will be parking your vehicle The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area 2 31 Automatic Transmission Operation It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll PRN D3 2 1 Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission engine running the vehicle can move and features an electronic shift position indicator suddenly You or others could be injured To located within the instrument panel cluster be sure your vehicle will not move even when There are several different positions for your shift lever you are on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P This position locks your drive wheels It PARK P See Shifting Into Park P on is the best position to use when you start your engine page 2 41 If you are pulling a trailer see because
319. n damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH system safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system was not being used at the time of the collision If an airbag inflates you will need to replace airbag system parts See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section Section 2 Features and Controls KYS aaron a 2 3 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal 2 30 Remote Keyless Entry System seeeeee ee 2 4 Engine Coolant Heater cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 31 Remote Keyless Entry System Operation 2 5 Automatic Transmission Operation 0 2 32 Doors and Locks 0 00 cccceceeseseeeeeseeeeeae ees 2 8 Tow Haul Mode ccseeeeeeeeeeettetteetteeees 2 35 Door LOCKS 0 cecccceceeeeceeeueseeuesesaeseeeneeenaes 2 8 Four Wheel Drive cceeeeeeeeeeeetteteetteees 2 35 Power Door LOCKS essers memeri ceneni 2 9 Parking Brake seseeeteeeeeteeteeteeteeteeees 2 40 Delayed Locking asenso EEN 2 9 Shifting Into Park P sssssssssseseisnineenennn 2 41 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 10 Shifting Out of Park P enean aE at nares tetas 2 43 Rear Door Security LOckS 00cccccceeeeeeee ees 2 12 Parking Over Things That Burn 0sse 2 43 Lockout Protection cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 Engine Exhaust 0 0eceeeeteeeetee
320. n Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 and Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 15 When your vehicle is serviced make sure these are used All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle We recommend the use of genuine GM parts Scheduled Maintenance When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on it means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if you are driving under the best conditions the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year However your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your GM Goodwrench dealer has GM trained service technicians who will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset the system If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally you must service your vehicle within 3 000 miles 5 000 km since your last service Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 20 for information on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears certain services checks and inspections are required Required services are described in the following for Maintenance I and Maintenance II Generally it i
321. n again This is normal Defogging and Defrosting There are two modes to choose from to clear fog or frost from your windshield Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to select one of the following modes E Defog This mode directs the air to the floor outlets windshield and the side window vents The air conditioning compressor will run automatically to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode P Defrost This mode directs most of the air to the windshield and the side window vents with only a little air directed to the floor vents The air conditioning compressor will run automatically to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in defrost mode 3 21 Rear Window Defogger If your vehicle has a rear defogger the lines you see on the rear window warm the glass The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window GJ Rear Press this button to turn the rear window defogger on or off An indicator light in the button will come on to let you know that the rear window defogger is activated The rear window defogger will automatically turn off several minutes after the button is pressed Pressing
322. n are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle s safety belts If you have the choice a child should sit in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt to get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide 1 29 Q What if a child is wearing a lap shoulder belt but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child s face or neck A If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position move the child toward the center of the vehicle If the child is sitting in the center position move the child toward the safety belt buckle In either case be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child s shoulder so that in a crash the child s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults on page 1 26 If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child s face or neck you might want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt if your vehicle has one Never do this Here two children are wearing the same belt The belt can not properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A
323. n burst into flames if a match is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the vehicle Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled in an enclosed space When anything from a container is used to clean the vehicle be sure to follow the manufacturer s warnings and instructions Always open the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning the inside 5 95 Never use these to clean the vehicle e Gasoline e Benzene e Naphtha e Carbon Tetrachloride e Acetone e Paint Thinner e Turpentine e Lacquer Thinner e Nail Polish Remover They can all be hazardous some more than others and they can all damage the vehicle too Do not use any of these products unless this manual says you can In many uses these will damage the vehicle e Alcohol e Laundry Soap e Bleach e Reducing Agents 5 96 Fabric Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt Wipe vinyl leather plastic and painted surfaces with a clean damp cloth GM approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer Here are some cleaning tips Always read the instructions on the cleaner label Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set Carefully scrape off any excess stain Use a clean cloth or sponge and change to a clean area often A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately or it will set Most stains
324. n the wheel nuts Don t remove the wheel nuts yet If the wheel has a smooth center cap place the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry out 5 83 Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle Jack positions overall view These locations A front position B rear position 3 Position the jack under the vehicle are the general area of jack placement See text and art following for the exact jack placement Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack 5 84 Front position Front Tire Flat If the flat tire is on a front tire of the vehicle you ll need to use the jack handle C and only one jack handle extension D Attach the wheel wrench to the jack handle extension Attach the jack handle to the jack Position the jack on the frame behind the flat tire where the frame sections overlap Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground Rear position 1500 series Rear position 2500
325. n to highlight the Video Format option 3 Press the enter button to select Video Format 4 Press the right or left arrow button to select the desired video format 5 Press the enter button to accept the change Audio Output Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be heard through the following possible sources e Wireless Headphones e Vehicle Speakers e Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat Audio system if equipped The RSE system will always transmit the audio signal by infrared to the wireless headphones if there is audio available See Headphones previously for more information The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the vehicle speakers by using the radio The RSE system may be selected as an audio source on the radio if the RSE system power is on Once the RSE system is selected as an audio source on the radio adjust the speaker volume on the radio if necessary If the RSE system power is not on the RSE system will not be an available source on the radio Refer to the radio information for the radio that your vehicle has for more information The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system if equipped The RSE system may be selected as an audio source on the rear seat audio system if the RSE system power is on Refer to Rear Seat Audio RSA on page 3 100 for more information 3 91 Video Screen The video screen i
326. n to reset certain DIC functions and set your customization settings Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge DIC messages and clear them from the DIC display 3 45 DIC Operation and Displays The Driver Information Center DIC comes on when the ignition is on After a short delay the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by pressing the four DIC buttons located on the steering wheel These buttons are trip information fuel information customization and select The button functions are detailed in the following pages Trip Information Button ZN Trip Information Press the trip information button to scroll through the ODOMETER TRIP A TRIP B TIMER and ENGINE HOURS Odometer Press the trip information button until ODOMETER appears on the display This mode shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles or kilometers Pressing the reset stem located on the instrument cluster with the vehicle off will also display the odometer 3 46 Trip A Press the trip information button until TRIP A appears on the display This mode shows the current distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP A in either miles or kilometers Trip B Press the trip information button until TRIP B appears on the display This mode shows the current distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP B in either
327. n up and pulling it straight out tight 2 Pull the headlamp assembly out 9 Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle and reinstall the two pins 10 Place the inboard end of the turn signal parking lamp housing into the pocket 11 Push the outboard side of the housing in until the release clip snaps into place 5 54 Si V A Low Beam Headlamp B High Beam Headlamp Unplug the electrical connector Turn the old bulb counterclockwise and remove it from the headlamp assembly Put the new bulb into the assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight Use care not to touch the bulb with your fingers or hands Plug in the electrical connector Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle Install the pin and turn it into the locking feature Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parking Lamps Vehicles with Body Side Cladding A Sidemarker Lamp B Front Turn Signal Parking Lamp 5 55 1 Remove the turn Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and signal parking lamp housing by pressing Daytime Running Lamps the release clip on the outboard side of the Vehicles without Body Side Cladding housing and pulling the outboard end of the housing toward you 2 Pull the inboard side of the housing out from the vehicle 3 Press the locking release lever the sidemarker lamp does not have a locking release lever turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the turn sig
328. n wet grass can cause your tires to slip sideways downhill If the vehicle slips sideways it can hit something that will trip it a rock a rut etc and roll over e Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression your vehicle can tilt even more For reasons like these you need to decide carefully whether to try to drive across an incline Just because the trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to drive it The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over Driving across an incline that is too steep will make your vehicle roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline do not drive across it Find another route instead Q What if am driving across an incline that is not too steep but hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill What should do sd If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways turn downhill This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping However a much better way to prevent this is to get out and walk the course so you know what the surface is like before you drive it 4 27 Stalling on an Incline If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline be sure you and any passengers get out on the uphill side even if the door there is
329. nal parking lamp housing 4 Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket 5 Put the new bulb into the bulb socket 6 Put the bulb socket into the turn signal housing and turn it clockwise until it locks the sidemarker lamp does not lock into place 7 Place the inboard end of the turn signal parking A Daytime Running Lamp DRL B Front Turn Signal Parking Lamp lamp housing into the pocket C Sidemarker Lamp 8 Push the outboard side of the housing in until the 1 Remove the headlamp assembly as release clip snaps into place mentioned previously 5 56 2 Press the retainer clip arrow located behind 3 Pull the turn signal housing out from the vehicle the turn signal housing towards the outside of the vehicle 4 Press the locking release lever the sidemarker Daytime Running Lamps DRL lamp does not have a locking release lever turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from Vehicles with Body Side Cladding the turn signal housing 5 Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket 6 Put the new bulb into the bulb socket Use care not to touch the bulb with your fingers or hands 7 Put the bulb socket into the turn signal housing and turn it clockwise until it locks the sidemarker lamps does not lock into place 8 Put the turn signal housing back onto the vehicle placing the hook and posts on the inner side into the alignment holes first and then the outer side into the retainer bracket Push unti
330. nce a leak means that sooner or later your brakes will not work well or will not work at all So it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak If you add fluid when your linings are worn then you will have too much fluid when you get new brake linings You should add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system If you have too much brake fluid it can spill on the engine The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and your vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system See Checking Brake Fluid in this section Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 5 41 Checking Brake Fluid You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap Look at the brake fluid reservoir The fluid level should be above MIN If it is not have your brake way system checked to cn see if there is a leak TA After work is done on the brake hydraulic system make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark What to Add When you do need brake fluid use only DOT 3 brake fluid Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 5 42 Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the ca
331. nces a delay in updating the temperature is normal 2 46 Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation The automatic dimming mirror function is turned on automatically each time the ignition is started To operate the automatic dimming mirror do the following 1 Make sure the green indicator light located to the left of the on off button is lit If it is not press and hold the on off button for approximately six seconds until the green light comes on indicating that the mirror is in automatic dimming mode 2 Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function by pressing and holding the on off button for approximately six seconds until the green indicator light turns off Compass Variance The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is outside of zone eight Under certain circumstances as during a long distance cross country trip it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance Compass variance is the difference between earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If not adjusted to account for compass variance the compass could give false readings To adjust for compass variance do the following 1 Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map 2 Press and hold the on off button until a Z and a zone number appears in the display The compass is now in zone mode 3 Keep pres
332. nd filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer has GM trained service people who will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset the system It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever reset accidentally you must change your oil at 3 000 miles 5 000 km since your last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use Anytime your oil is changed reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required If a situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on reset the system To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message see Engine Oil Life System under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 46 for vehicles equipped with the DIC or do the following 1 Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off 2 Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly three times within five seconds If the OIL LIFE RESET message flashes for 10 seconds the system is resetting 3 Turn the key to LOCK If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on when you start your vehicle the engine oil life system has not reset Repeat the procedure If it still does not reset see your dealer for service
333. nditioner to work its best On cool but sunny days while using manual operation of the automatic system use bi level to deliver warm air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets To warm or cool the air delivered turn the temperature knob to the desired setting In AUTO mode the system will cool and dehumidify the air inside the vehicle Also while in AUTO mode the system will maximize its performance by using recirculation as necessary O Off Press this button to turn off the entire climate control system Outside air will still enter the vehicle and will be directed to the floor This direction can be changed by pressing the mode button The temperature can also be adjusted using either temperature knob Press the up or down arrows on the fan switch the defrost button the AUTO button or the air conditioning button to turn the system on when it is off Defogging and Defrosting You can use either defog or front defrost to clear fog or frost from your windshield Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture Use the front defrost button to defrost the front windshield amp Defog Use this setting to clear the windows of fog or moisture Press the mode button to select this setting This setting will deliver air to the floor and windshield outlets W Defrost Press this button to defrost the windshield The system will automatically control the fan speed if you select defrost from
334. ndows as necessary 3 If you are in a traffic jam shift to NEUTRAL N otherwise shift to the highest gear while driving DRIVE D If you no longer have the overheat warning you can drive Just to be safe drive slower for about 10 minutes If the warning does not come back on you can drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park your vehicle right away If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle is equipped with an engine driven cooling fan push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while you are parked If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle is equipped with an electric engine cooling fan idle the engine for three minutes while you are parked If you still have the warning turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down Also see Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode later in this section You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away 5 31 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode If an overheated engine condition exists and the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage In this mode you will notice a loss in power and engine performance This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergen
335. ne of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that tells you what to do about it Please follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous So please get to know your warning lights and gages They re a big help Your vehicle also has a message center that works along with the warning lights and gages See Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 45 Instrument Panel Cluster United States 2500 series shown 1500 series and Canada similar Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running You ll know how fast you re going about how much fuel you have and many other things you ll need to know to drive safely and economically 3 29 Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h Your vehicle s odometer works together with the driver information center You can set a Trip A and Trip B odometer See Trip Information under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 46 The odometer mileage can be checked without the vehicle running Simply press the trip stem on the instrument panel cluster If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed the new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the old odometer Tachometer Your tachometer displays the engine spe
336. ness and even death If you must drive with the cargo covers on and the tailgate and midgate open CAUTION Continued Midgate Operation Your vehicle is equipped with a midgate and a removable rear glass panel The midgate allows you to extend the length of your vehicle s cargo area The following are the main components of the midgate system D Glass Lock Knobs E Window Retaining Tabs F Midgate Release Handle G Window Alignment Arrows A Latch Levers B Grab Handles C Glass Catch Release Button 2 14 Rear Glass Removal and Storage A CAUTION If the removable rear glass is not stored properly it could be thrown about the vehicle in a crash or sudden maneuver People in the vehicle could be injured Whenever you store the rear glass in the vehicle always be sure that it is stored securely in the midgate storage pocket Do not remove the rear glass when the rear defroster is on If you remove the rear glass with the rear defroster on you may see a discharge spark coming from the latch area To remove the rear glass do the following 1 Fold the rear seats See Rear Seat Operation on page 1 7 for more information The front seats may have to be moved forward slightly to allow the rear seats to fold completely Although the rear glass can be removed without folding the rear seats you will not be able to access the rear glass storage pocket Be sure to fold the seats before removing the rear g
337. ng poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control Driving on frozen lakes ponds or rivers can be dangerous Underwater springs currents under the ice or sudden thaws can weaken the ice Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only Driving in Water Heavy rain can mean flash flooding and flood waters demand extreme caution Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs axles or exhaust pipe do not try you probably will not get through Also water that deep can damage your axle and other vehicle parts If the water is not too deep drive slowly through it At faster speeds water splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall Stalling can also occur if you get your tailpipe under water And as long as your tailpipe is under water you will never be able to start your engine When you go through water remember that when your brakes get wet it may take you longer to stop Driving through rushing water can be dangerous Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown If it is only shallow water it can still wash away the ground from under your tires and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over Do not drive through rushing water See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4 32 for
338. ng system light on the instrument panel cluster will come on See Charging System Light on page 3 33 and Voltmeter Gage on page 3 34 for more information Driving with this problem could drain your battery Turn off all unnecessary accessories Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so Have the electrical system checked by your GM dealer immediately CHECK OIL LEVEL If the oil level in the vehicle is low this message will appear on the DIC Check the oil level and correct it as necessary You may need to let the vehicle cool or warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure this message will clear This message will clear itself after 10 seconds until the next ignition cycle See Engine Oil on page 5 17 for additional information CHECK WASHER FLUID If the washer fluid level is low this message will appear on the DIC Adding washer fluid will clear the message See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 40 Pressing any of the four DIC buttons if equipped will clear the message from the DIC display If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clear the message from the DIC display If you do not clear this message it will clear itself after 10 seconds until the next ignition cycle DRIVER DOOR AJAR If the driver s door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear this message will appear on the display and you will hear a chime Stop and turn off th
339. ng Light cccceeceeee 3 35 Daytime Running Lamps DRL i 2 scenes 3 15 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light 3 36 Automatic Headlamp System 3 15 Traction Off Light ieser esitasin 3 36 Fog Lamps E E A E AT E EN 3 16 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage 3 37 Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp ree 3 17 Transmission Temperature Gage 0 cc008 3 38 Exterior Cargo LAMPS ceeeeeereeeeeeeeeeees 3 17 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ccccccceeeeeeeeees 3 39 Instrument Panel Brightness eee 3 17 Oil Pressure Gage cccccccccccseeecseeseeeeeeeees 3 42 Dome LAMPS it isessissaniaisitrarsintsraisirispsinanneii 3 18 Security Light a sielen enait 3 43 Entry Exit Lighting ssssssssisirneiennnenereneneene 3 18 Cruise Control Light cccccccccceeeessseeeeeeeees 3 43 Reading Lamps filer eteeee tent tense rneeees 3 18 Highbeam On Light cccccccceceseesesseeseeseeees 3 43 Battery Run Down Protection ss 3 19 Tow Haul Mode Light e esscssseseseseeseees 3 44 Accessory Power Outlets n se 3 19 F el Gage senreste iee 3 44 Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter s 3 19 Low Fuel Warning Light csseeeeeeeeeees 3 44 Section 3 Instrument Panel Driver Information Center DIC 0 3 45 Rear Seat Audio RSA a a 3 100 DIC Operation and Displays 6 0e0eee 3 46 Theft Deterrent Featu
340. ng RDS The display options are station name RDS station frequency PTY and the name of the program if available 3 66 For XM if equipped press the INFO knob while in XM mode to retrieve four different categories of information related to the current song or channel Artist Song Title Category or PTY Channel Number Channel Name To change the default on the display press the INFO knob until you see the display you want then hold the knob until you hear a beep The selected display will now be the default AUTO VOL Automatic Volume With automatic volume the audio system will adjust automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive by increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases Set the volume at the desired level Press this button to select LOW MEDIUM or HIGH AVOL will appear on the display Each higher setting will provide more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds To turn automatic volume off press this button until AVOL OFF appears on the display Finding a Station BAND Press this button to switch between FM1 FM2 AM or XM1 or XM2 if equipped The display will show the selection lt 1 TUNE gt Turn this knob to select radio stations Ki SEEK D Press either the SEEK or the TYPE arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band Ki SCAN FEC Press and hol
341. nly in moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crashes They are not designed to inflate in rollover rear or low speed frontal crashes or in many side crashes And for some unrestrained occupants frontal airbags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful airbags have provided in the past Side impact airbags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to inflate only in moderate to severe crashes where something CAUTION Continued 1 50 hits the side of your vehicle They are not designed to inflate in frontal in rollover or in rear crashes Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye If you are too close to an inflating airbag as you would be if you were leaning forward it could seriously injure you Safety belts help keep you in position for airbag inflation before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with frontal airbags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Front occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door Anyone who is up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults but not for young children and infants Neithe
342. o decrease The display will show the bass midrange without Bose or treble level If a station is weak or noisy decrease the treble To adjust the bass midrange without Bose and treble to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display level to the middle position To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker controls are displayed ALL CENTERED will appear on the display and you will hear a beep AUTO EQ Automatic Equalization Press this button to select customized equalization settings designed for country western jazz talk pop rock and classical The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for each preset and source If the radio is equipped with the Bose audio system the equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade AUDIO To adjust the balance between the right and the left speakers push and release the AUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers push and release the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on the display Turn the knob to move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob The radio will produce one beep and a
343. o the fuel gage will come on briefly when you are starting the engine This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel To turn it off add fuel to the fuel tank See Fuel on page 5 5 Driver Information Center DIC The Driver Information Center DIC display is located on the instrument panel cluster below the speedometer The DIC buttons if equipped are located on the steering wheel The DIC can display information such as the trip odometer fuel economy customization features and warning status messages If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC steering wheel buttons you will not have all of the features listed You will scroll through the odometer trip odometer and engine hours by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the instrument panel cluster You will also turn off or acknowledge DIC messages by pressing the trip odometer reset stem See Speedometer and Odometer on page 3 30 for information on features for vehicles without DIC buttons A Z Trip Information Press this button to display the odometer trip odometers tire pressure for vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor timer and engine hours B E Fuel Information Press this button to display the current range fuel used average fuel economy and engine oil life Ci Customization Press this button to access the vehicle settings menu and customize the personal settings on your vehicle D lt Select Press this butto
344. o the off position Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 2 2D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low to high beam push the lever toward the instrument panel To return to low beam headlamps pull the multifunction lever toward you Then release it When the high beams are on this indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on Flash to Pass This feature lets you use your high beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic position To use it pull the turn signal lever toward you then release it If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on low beam your high beam headlamps will turn on They ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you The high beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will come on Release the lever to return to normal operation Windshield Wipers You control the windshield wipers by turning the band with the wiper symbol on it Q Mist For a single wiping cycle turn the band to mist Hold it there until the wipers start Then let go The wipers will stop after one wipe If you want more wipes hold the band on mist longer SY Delay You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes This can be very useful in light rain or snow Turn the band to choose the delay time The closer to the top of the lever the shorter the delay
345. oindewencupeshaseneamenth 5 6 California Fuel s s 2ic0 loos cei haat 5 6 E 85 85 Ethanol iccctssceacise tanien gones 5 7 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 0 5 11 Filling Your Tank i ccneeecaecheiendabectadees censkinsad tagiees 5 9 Fuels in Foreign Countries eeeeeeneeeeeeee 5 9 Gage E A dai ete aoe ld 3 44 Gasoline Octane cceeeeeeeeeeeeee trannie niania 5 5 Gasoline Specifications ceeeeeeeeeeeeeneee ees 5 5 Low Warning Light i c c 1 tsecspdecdectcneancieden canes 3 44 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block Fuses and Circuit Breakers Instrument Panel Fuse Block Underhood Fuse Block Windshield Wiper Engine Coolant Temperature ceeeeeee Transmission Temperature Voltmeter Gage Garage Door Opener GM Mobility Reimbursement Program Hazard Warning Flashers Head Restraints Headlamps saci caasceectgociaeesctaeesshelsierensgannanenntead 5 53 Automatic Headlamp System 0 ceeeeeee 3 15 Bulb Replacement eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 52 Daytime Running Lamps 0608 3 15 5 58 Flash tO PasS wiccccaseccuctadideacetaceemiednnd thee casera 3 9 Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Daytime RUNNING AMPS ea o e cceienten Geese eeetacnies 5 56 Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parking Lamps inin nanni 5 55 Halogen BUDS icacnsirenainoreiriniieonionsss 5 52 High Low Beam Changer eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 8 On Remind
346. om overheating may occur to the lighter or heating element or a fuse could be blown Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating Do not use anything other than the cigarette lighter in the heating element 3 19 Climate Controls Dual Climate Control System With this system you can control the heating cooling and ventilation for your vehicle 8 Fan Turn the left knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed Turn the knob to the off position to turn off the fan If the knob is in off outside air will still enter the vehicle and will be directed based on the position of the mode knob The temperature can also be adjusted using the temperature levers Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to direct the airflow inside of your vehicle 3 20 To change the current mode select one of the following 7s Vent This mode directs air to the instrument panel vents me Bi Level This mode directs half of the air to the instrument panel vents then directs most of the remaining air to the floor vents A little air is directed toward the windshield and the side window vents Cooler air is directed to the upper vents and warmer air to the floor vents ted Floor This mode directs most of the air to the floor vents with a little air directed to the windshield and the side window vents Recirculation The recirculation mode is used to recirculate the air inside o
347. omization DIC essscsssosresereerreesres 3 58 Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data RScCorderS aia a a 7 9 Vehicle Identification Number VIN erdisiiissarenarreenineaenn 5 104 Service Parts Identification Label 5 104 Vehicle Personalization Memory Seat jcsiectsctasart ddaiar on nn 2 85 Ventilation Adjustment eeceeeeeeee sents eee eees 3 27 VISOIS sevdveusatevdeseeane ed rte aarti Hie R E OES 2 25 Voltmeter Gage cceeeeeeeeeeeneeeee eee een eee eeaeeaes 3 34 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 28 Warnings DIC Warnings and Messages 6 eseeeeeees 3 49 Hazard Warning Flashers ccecce 3 6 13 Warnings cont Other Warning Devices ceeeeeeeeee tere ees 3 6 Safety and SyMbols eisir eirinen aira iii Vehicle Damage sceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeseees iv Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance cee 5 74 Replacement esra rni atenesnbenawteraxeatagers 5 74 Where to Put the Restraint eee 1 38 WIMGOWS ainidi Si chcacertinwsaatenaetate nd ceeestdunentearddaes 2 24 POWGR ssdciiiedhetiaiecten o E aa E A AEAEE 2 25 Windshield Wiper Blades Cleaning ceeeeeeeeneee ees 5 100 Windshield Washer ceceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeee een es 3 10 PUIG EEEE E A TA ET 5 40 14 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement sicceiiincniisnanosiisniiei 5 60 FUSOS eaaa eines added cornet eels 5 105 Windshield Wipers
348. ong list press the SONG LIST button One beep will be heard and S LIST will appear on the display The recorded tracks will begin to play in the order they were saved Seek through the song list by using the SEEK or TYPE arrows Seeking past the last saved track will return to the first saved track To delete tracks from the song list perform the following steps 1 Turn the CD player on 2 Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on S LIST will appear on the display 3 Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow to select the desired track to be deleted 4 Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two seconds When SONG LIST is pressed one beep will be heard immediately After two seconds of continuously pressing the SONG LIST button two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track has been deleted After a track has been deleted the remaining tracks are moved up the list When another track is added to the song list the track will be added to the end of the list 3 87 To delete the entire song list perform the following steps 1 Turn the CD player on 2 Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on S LIST will appear on the display 3 Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more than four seconds One beep will be heard followed by two beeps after two seconds and a final beep will be heard after four seconds S LIST EMPTY will appear on the display indicating the song list has been deleted If a CD is
349. ons on how far and how long they can tow e Do you have the proper towing equipment See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations e ls your vehicle ready to be towed Just as you would prepare your vehicle for a long trip you ll want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 4 36 Dinghy Towing Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Notice lf you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground the drivetrain components could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground Two wheel drive vehicles should not be towed with all four wheels on the ground Two wheel drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed Four Wheel Drive Vehicles Only 4 57 Four Wheel Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle 1 Shift the transmission to PARK P 2 Turn the engine off but leave the ignition on 3 Firmly set the parking brake 4 Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P You or someone else could be seriously injured Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in NEUTRAL See Parking Brake on page 2 40 5 Shift
350. ons on page 5 114 for the wheel nut may break torque specification 5 88 e If you are reinstalling plastic nut caps tighten the nuts by hand to get them started Then tighten the nut caps with the wheel wrench until they are snug Do not overtighten the nut caps or they may break e If you are reinstalling the smooth center cap place it on the wheel and tap it into place until it seats flush with the wheel Secondary Latch System Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist assembly equipped with a secondary latch system It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling off your vehicle For the secondary latch to work the spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing down See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 92 Before beginning this procedure read all the instructions Failure to read and follow the instructions could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get hurt Read and follow the instructions listed below To release the spare tire from the secondary latch do the following 1 Check under the vehicle to see if the cable end is visible If the cable is not visible proceed to Step 6 2 If it is visible first try to tighten the cable by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice You cannot overtighten the cable 3 Loosen the cable by turning the wrench counterclockwise three or four turns 5 89 4 Repea
351. oon as possible and have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer Notice lf you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low severe engine damage may occur If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver Information Center DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected See Engine Oil on page 5 17 for more information PASSENGER DOOR AJAR If the passenger s door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear this message will appear on the display and you will hear a chime Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstacles and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC Pressing any of the four DIC buttons if equipped will clear the message from the DIC display If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons pressing the trip odometer reset stem will clear the message from the DIC display 3 53 REDUCED ENGINE POWER This message is displayed and a chime will sound when the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters the engine coolant protection mode See Engine Overheating on page 5 30 for further information You may also see this message when the vehicle determines a problem with the electronic throttle control See your GM dealer for service RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR If the passenger s side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is
352. operation the security light will turn off approximately five seconds after the key is turned to RUN If the engine stalls and the security light flashes wait about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before trying to restart the engine Remember to release the key from START as soon as the engine starts If the engine does not start after three tries the vehicle needs service If the engine is running and the security light comes on you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine off However your Passlock system is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time You may also want to check the fuse See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 105 See your dealer for service In an emergency call the Roadside Assistance Center See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 2 27 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break In Notice Your vehicle does not need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines e Keep your speed at 55 mph 88 km h or less for the first 500 miles 805 km e Do not drive at any one speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Do not make full throttle starts e Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time your new brake linings are not yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean prem
353. or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired How to Check Power Steering Fluid Locate the cap with this symbol See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for more information on location AR To check the power steering fluid do the following 1 Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down 2 Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean 3 Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag 4 Replace the cap and completely tighten it 5 Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The level should be at the FULL COLD mark If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Always use the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals 5 39 Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid be sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing Adding Washer Fluid Your vehicle has a low washer fluid message that comes on when the washer fluid is low The message is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition cycle Wh
354. or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored See Top Strap on page 1 39 if your child restraint has one You will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Your vehicle has a right front passenger s frontal air bag See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 58 General Motors recommends that rear facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat even if the air bag is off If your child restraint is forward facing move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the child restraint in this seat See Power Seats on page 1 2 or Manual Passenger Seat on page 1 2 When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger s frontal air bag the off indicator in the passenger air bag status indicator should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to RUN or START See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 32 Put the child restraint on the seat Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to
355. or inspection 3 41 Oil Pressure Gage Canada United States The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi pounds per square inch when the engine is running Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa kilopascals Oil pressure may vary with engine speed outside temperature and oil viscosity but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range 3 42 A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing low oil pressure Check your oil as soon as possible See Engine Oil on page 5 17 Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil Security Light This light will come on briefly when you turn the key toward START The light will stay on until the engine starts If the light flashes the Passlock system has entered a tamper mode If the vehicle fails to start see Pass ock on page 2 27 If the light comes on continuously while driving and stays on there may be a problem with the Passlock system Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock and
356. or long periods of time as debris may collect in the tracks If the battery has been recharged disconnected or is not working the sunroof may need to be reprogrammed To do this start the vehicle and press the forward side of the sunroof button until the glass panel moves to a fully closed position Release and press again to move to the vent position which occurs when the sunroof is fully tilted rearward This will reset the memory and enable the sunroof to function properly Vehicle Personalization Memory Seat If your vehicle has this feature the controls for the memory function are located on the driver s door These buttons are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver s seat throttle and brake pedals and both the driver s and passenger s outside mirrors The settings for these features can be saved for up to two drivers 2 85 To store the settings do the following 1 While the vehicle is in PARK P adjust the driver s seat including the seatback recliner lumbar and side wing area throttle and brake pedals and both of the outside mirrors to your preference 2 Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memory control for three seconds A double chime will sound to let you know that the position has been stored To repeat the procedure for a second driver follow the preceding steps but press the other numbered memory control button Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and releas
357. or of the button may vary by manufacturer You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8 8 Return to the vehicle Firmly press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for two seconds then release Repeat the press hold release sequence a second time and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons begin with Step 2 of Programming HomeLink You do not want to repeat Step 1 as this will erase all previous programming Gate Operator and Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission This may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similarly some U S gate operators are manufactured to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficulty programming a gate operator by using the Programming HomeLink procedures regardless of where you live replace Step 3 under Programming HomeLink with the following Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until the frequency signal has been successfully accepted by HomeLink The indicator light will flas
358. ormatted as DVD Video DVD R and DVD RW media may or may not be supported by the DVD player The DVD player does not support DVD RAM DVD ROM and DVD Audio media An error message will appear on the display if this type of media is inserted into the DVD player When using the wired headphones not included if the front seat passengers play a CD in the Radio with Six Disc CD if equipped or use XM Satellite Radio Service if equipped you will hear the audio for these sources instead of the DVD or CD that is currently playing through the RSE If an error message appears on the video screen see DVD Messages later in this section DVD Player Buttons D Power Press this button to turn the RSE system on and off The power indicator light will illuminate when the power is on A Eject Press this button to eject a DVD or CD SRCE Source Press this button to switch between the DVD player and an auxiliary source E Stop Press this button to stop playing rewinding or fast forwarding a DVD or CD Press this button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD gt Play Pause Press this button to start play of a DVD or CD Press this button while a DVD or CD is playing to pause it Press this button again to continue the play of the DVD or CD Main DVD Menu Press this button to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the up down left and right arrow buttons to move the
359. ot swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane As you go over the top of a hill be alert There could be something in your lane like a stalled car or an accident You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems Examples are long grades passing or no passing zones a falling rocks area or winding roads Be alert to these and take appropriate action 4 39 Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving e Have your vehicle in good shape for winter e You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle Also see Tires on page 5 61 4 40 Include an ice scraper a small brush or broom a supply of windshield washer fluid a rag some winter outer clothing a small shovel a flashlight a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles And if you will be driving under severe conditions include a small bag of sand a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction However if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road you can have a very slippery situation You will have a lot less traction or grip and will need to be very careful tA What is the worst time for this Wet ice Very
360. otection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded Lubricate the front suspension ball joints steering linkage transmission shift linkage and parking brake cable guides Ball joints should not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10 F 12 C or higher or they could be damaged a Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc b Visually inspect front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts signs of wear or lack of lubrication Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Visually check constant velocity joints rubber boots and axle seals for leaks c Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace with genuine GM 6 8 parts as needed To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the ou
361. ou Are Parked It is better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle See the earlier caution under Engine Exhaust on page 2 44 Also idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide CO into your vehicle even if the climate control fan is at the highest setting One place this can happen is a garage Exhaust with CO can come in easily NEVER park in a garage with the engine running Another closed in place can be a blizzard See Winter Driving on page 4 40 It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P Four wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL Always set your parking brake Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not move See Shifting Into Park P on page
362. ough an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening Power Door Locks The power door lock switches are located on the driver s and front passenger s armrests Lock Remove the ignition key and press the lock symbol to lock all of the doors If the delayed locking feature is on the doors will not lock until five seconds after the last door is closed Press the lock symbol twice to override this feature and lock all of the doors immediately See Delayed Locking on page 2 9 for more information A Unlock To unlock the doors press the unlock symbol Delayed Locking When locking the doors with the power lock switch or the keyless entry transmitter and a door or the liftgate if equipped is open the delayed locking feature will delay locking the doors until five seconds after the last door is closed You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use Pressing the power lock switch or the lock button on the keyless entry transmitter twice will override the delayed locking feature and immediately lock all the doors You can turn the delayed locking feature off or back on again by doing the following 1 Press and hold the power door lock switch in the lock position 2 Press unlock twice on the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition You can also progr
363. our vehicle is in PARK P and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you move the shift lever into PARK P hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK P without first pulling it toward you If you can it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK P Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your transmission into PARK P properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK P This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into PARK P properly before you leave the driver s seat To find out how see Shifting Into Park P on page 2 41 When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of PARK P before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK P Shifting Out of Park P Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition is in RUN See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2 32 If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift leve
364. ove that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns Notice Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When you re turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer won t strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps will also flash telling other drivers you re about to turn change lanes or stop When towing a trailer the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not It s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working 4 69 Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you don t shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well You can tow in DRIVE D You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 8 or if necessary a
365. p before removing it This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system your brakes may not work well or they may not even work at all This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid Notice e Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid e If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Appearance Care on page 5 95 Brake Wear Your vehicle has four wheel disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes will not work well That could lead to an accident When you hear the brake wear warning sound have your vehicle serviced Notice Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes a
366. p you get out when you are stuck but you must use caution If you let your tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured And the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can overheat That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage When you are stuck spin the wheels as little as possible Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer Notice Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transmission back and forth you can destroy your transmission For more information about using tire chains on your vehicle see Tire Chains on page 5 76 4 44 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out First turn your steering wheel left and right That will clear the area around your front wheels If you have a four wheel drive vehicle shift into 4HI or 4LO If your vehicle has the Traction Assist System you should turn it off by pressing the TAS on off button If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak System turn the system off by pressing the StabiliTrak button so that the STABILITY SYS DISABLED message and the traction off light are illuminated on the instrument panel cluster Then shift back and forth between REVERSE R and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible Release the accelerator pedal while you shift and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the
367. page 4 5 It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Off Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another ona two lane highway waits for just the right moment accelerates moves around the vehicle ahead then goes back into the right lane again A simple maneuver Not necessarily
368. passengers less cargo or by positioning cargo towards the rear This has the effect of reducing the load on the front However the front GAWR rear GAWR and the GVWR must never be exceeded On some vehicles equipped with certain front mounted equipment such as a snow plow it may be possible to load the front axle to the front GAWR but not have enough weight on the rear axle to have proper braking performance If your brakes can not work properly you could have a crash To help your brakes work properly when a snow plow is installed always follow the snow plow manufacturer or installer s recommendation for rear ballast to ensure a proper front and rear weight distribution ratio even though the actual front weight may be less than the front GAWR and the total vehicle weight is less than the GVWR Maintaining a proper front and rear weight distribution ratio is necessary to provide proper braking performance Q What is total vehicle reserve capacity A This is the difference between your GVWR and the weight of your truck with full fuel and passengers It is the amount of weight you can add to your vehicle before reaching your GVWR Keep in mind that reserve capacity numbers are intended as a guide when selecting the amount of equipment or cargo your truck can carry If you are unsure of your truck s front rear or total weight go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can also help you with this The to
369. people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Top Strap Some child restraints have a top strap or top tether It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision For it to work a top strap must be properly anchored to the vehicle Some top strap equipped child restraints are designed for use with or without the top strap being anchored Others require the top strap always to be anchored Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint If yours requires that the top strap be anchored do not use the restraint unless it is anchored properly If the child restraint does not have a top strap one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top strap and that the strap be anchored In the United States some child restraints also have a top strap If your child restraint has a top strap it should be anchored 1 39 Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor points Be sure to use an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed If you have an adjustable head restraint route the top strap under it Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor only one child restraint Attaching more
370. proper vehicle loading and good handling when driving You should always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more than these limits You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls 4 67 Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes If your trailer weighs more than 2 000 Ibs 900 kg loaded then it needs its own brakes and they must be adequate Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you ll be able to install adjust and maintain them properly Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle s hydraulic brake system only if e The trailer parts can withstand 3 000 psi 20 650 kPa of pressure e The trailers brake system will use less than 0 02 cubic inch 0 3 cc of fluid from your vehicle s master cylinder Otherwise both braking systems won t work well You could even lose your brakes e Your vehicle is not equipped with StabiliTrak 4 68 If everything checks out this far make the brake tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid to the rear brakes But don t use copper tubing for this If you do it will bend and finally break off U
371. r discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification Canadian Roadside Assistance Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States Please refer to the Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book Courtesy Transportation Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for new vehicles The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase lease customers in conjunction with the Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service you should contact your dealer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership let them know this and ask for instructions
372. r and push the shift lever all the way up into PARK P as you maintain brake application Then move the shift lever into the gear you want If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot shift out of PARK P try this 1 Turn the key to ACCESSORY There is no shift interlock in this key position 2 Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4 3 Shift the vehicle to NEUTRAL N 4 Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want 5 Have the system fixed as soon as possible Parking Over Things That Burn a Dr F f Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite Do not park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn 2 43 Engine Exhaust Engine exhaust can kill It contains the gas carbon monoxide CO which you cannot see or smell It can cause unconsciousness and death You might have exhaust coming in if Your exhaust system sounds strange or different Your vehicle gets rusty underneath Your vehicle was damaged in a collision Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris Repairs were not done correctly Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO and e Have your vehicle fixed immediately 2 44 Running Your Engine While Y
373. r and the clutch is not fully engaged This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures the fan speed increases as the clutch more fully engages so you may hear an increase in fan noise This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts It is merely the cooling system functioning properly The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages You may also hear this fan noise when you start the engine It will go away as the fan clutch partially disengages If your vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans you may hear the fans spinning at low speed during most everyday driving The fans may turn off if no cooling is required Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures or if you are operating your air conditioning system the fans change to high speed and you may hear an increase in fan noise This is normal and indicates that the cooling system is functioning properly The fans will change to low speed when additional cooling is no longer required 5 37 Power Steering Fluid 5 38 5300 V8 engine 8100 V8 engine See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for reservoir location When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system
374. r and you have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles e you have less time to react e you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles e you will need more distance for braking especially since you re on an unpaved surface When you are driving off road bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position This could cause you to lose control and crash So whether you re driving on or off the road you and your passengers should wear safety belts Scanning the Terrain Off road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain You need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features Here are some things to consider Surface Conditions Off roading can take you over hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow or ice Each of these surfaces affects the steering acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways Depending upon the kind of surface you are on you may experience slipping sliding wheel spinning delayed acceleration poor traction and longer braking distances Surface Obstacles Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous A rock log hole rut or bump can startle you if you are not prepared for them Often these obstacles are hidden by grass bushes snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself Here are some things to consider e Is the path ahead clear e Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahe
375. r attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into NEUTRAL N to rev up the engine and regain forward momentum This will not work Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could go out of control Instead apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle Then apply the parking brake Shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back straight down Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle it is steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around If you cannot make it up the hill you must back straight down the hill Q Suppose after stalling try to back down A the hill and decide I just cannot do it What should do Set the parking brake put your transmission in PARK P and turn off the engine Leave the vehicle and go get some help Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill Do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle Leave it in some gear Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P This is because the NEUTRAL position on the transfer case overrides the transmission You or someone else could be injured If you are going to leave your vehicle set the parking brake and shift the transmission to PARK P But do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL Leave the
376. r lamp may turn on If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for service Fuel E 85 85 Ethanol The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number VIN shows the code letter or number that identifies your engine You will find the VIN at the top left of the instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number VIN on page 5 104 If your vehicle has the 5 3L V8 engine VIN Code Z only you may use either regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85 ethanol E 85 also see Fuel on page 5 5 In all other engines including the 5 3L V8 VIN Code T use only regular unleaded gasoline Only vehicles that have the 5 3L V8 engine VIN Code Z may use 85 ethanol fuel E 85 General Motors encourages the use of E 85 in vehicles that are designed to use it The ethanol in E 85 is a renewable fuel meaning it is made from renewable sources such as corn and other crops Many service stations will not have an 85 ethanol fuel E 85 pump available The U S Department of Energy has an alternative fuels website http www afdc doe gov refueling_mapsite shtml that can help you find E 85 fuel Those stations that do have E 85 should have a label indicating ethanol content Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content is greater than 85 Your vehicle may not operate properly if the ethanol content is greater than 85 At a minimum E 85 should meet ASTM Specification D 5798 To ensure quick star
377. r or the tailgate is open the delayed locking feature will delay locking the doors and tailgate until five seconds after the last door is closed Press the customization button until DOOR LOCK DELAY appears in the display To select your preference for delayed locking press the select button while DOOR LOCK DELAY is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices DOOR LOCK DELAY OFF default The doors will lock immediately when pressing the power lock switch or the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter DOOR LOCK DELAY ON The doors will not lock until five seconds after the last door or the tailgate is closed You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use You can temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the lock button on the door or the remote keyless entry transmitter a second time Choose one of the available options and press the customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature For more information on automatic door locks see Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2 10 This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition 3 59 Lock Feedback Press the customization button until LOCK FEEDBACK appears in the display To select your preference for the feedback you receive when locking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter press the select
378. r the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see Older Children on page 1 29 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 32 There is an airbag readiness light on e the instrument panel cluster which shows the FN airbag symbol The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 31 for more information Where Are the Airbags The driver s frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel 1 51 The right front passenger s frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side 1 52 If your vehicle has one the driver s side impact airbag is in the side of the driver s seatback closest to the door If something is between an occupant and an airbag the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering Do not let seat covers block the inflation path of a side impact airbag If your vehicle has one the right front passenger s s
379. r the front of the and hold the front of the control Let go of the vehicle This adjusts the angle of the seatback control when the lower seatback reaches the For more information on the reclining seatbacks see desired level of support Reclining Seatbacks on page 1 5 e To decrease support in the lower back area press Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows and hold the rear of the control Let go of the seat settings to be saved and recalled See Memory control when the lower seatback reaches the Seat on page 2 85 for more information desired level of support You can also reshape the back wing area of the lower seatback e To decrease support in the wing area of the lower seatback press and hold the bottom of the control To increase support in the wing area of the lower seatback press and hold the top of the control Let go of the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of support Let go of the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of support Heated Seats Your vehicle may have heated front seats The buttons used to control this feature are located on the front doors The engine must be running for the heated seat feature to work Sh Ele To heat the entire seat press the horizontal button with the heated seat symbol Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn the heated seat off Indicator lights will glow
380. r two chimes The number of chimes tells you which lock mode is currently selected Continue to press the door lock switch until the number of chimes that you hear matches the number of the mode that you want If you take longer than 30 seconds the locks will automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have left the program mode If this occurs you can repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1 to re enter the programming mode You can exit the program mode any time by turning the ignition to RUN The doors will automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you are leaving the program mode If the lock unlock switches are not pressed while in the programming mode the current automatic settings will not be modified Programmable Unlocking Feature The following is the list of available programming options Mode 1 Driver s door unlocks when the transmission is shifted into PARK P Mode 2 All doors unlock when the transmission is shifted into PARK P Mode 3 All doors unlock when the key is removed from the ignition Mode 4 No automatic door unlock The following instructions tell you how to change the automatic door unlock mode Choose one of the four programming options listed above before entering the program mode To enter the program mode do the following 1 Begin with the ignition off Then pull the turn signal multifunction lever toward yo
381. r vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off General Motors recommends that rear facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag if e the right front passenger seat is unoccupied e the system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat e the system determines that a small child is present in a forward facing child restraint e the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat e aright front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time e the right front passenger seat is occupied by a smaller person such as a chil
382. rack has been playing To change the default on the display track or elapsed time press the knob until you see the display you want then hold the knob until you hear a beep The selected display will now be the default BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The inactive CD s will remain safely inside the radio for future listening Using Song List Mode The six disc CD changer has a feature called song list This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections To save tracks into the song list feature perform the following steps 1 Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one CD See LOAD CD listed previously in this section for more information 2 Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list mode S LIST should not appear on the display If S LIST is present press the SONG LIST button to turn it off 3 Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered pushbutton and then use the SEEK or TYPE right arrow to locate the track to be saved The track will begin to play 4 Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save the track into memory When SONG LIST is pressed one beep will be heard immediately After two seconds of continuously pressing the SONG LIST button two beeps will sound to confirm the track has been saved 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections S LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to save more than 20 selections To play the s
383. re seeeeeeeees 3 102 DIC Warnings and Messages 0 0eeeeees 3 49 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 2655 3 102 DIC Vehicle Customization cceeeeeeeee eee 3 58 Radio Reception eceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeereeees 3 103 Audio System S 0 ccccccceeesseeeeeceeeeeenees 3 64 Care of Your CDs and DVDS 1 e 3 104 Setting the Dk AE E E E E 3 64 Care of Your CD and DVD Player 3 104 Radio With GD isar oea RS 3 65 Fixed Mast Antenna scrrrr rrr 3 104 Radio with Six Disc CD ciscssccacensannsacscinesasceans 3 75 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 104 Rear Seat Entertainment System 0c0c00 3 89 Chime Level Adjustment c ceeeeeeeee eres 3 104 Navigation Radio System c ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 100 4 NOTES 3 3 Instrument Panel Overview The main components of your instrument panel are the following A B C Air Outlets See Outlet Adjustment on page 3 27 Exterior Lamps Control See Exterior Lamps on page 3 14 Cargo Top Box Lamps Button See Exterior Cargo Lamps on page 3 17 Automatic Transfer Case Buttons If Equipped See Four Wheel Drive on page 2 35 Traction Assist System If Equipped See Traction Assist System TAS on page 4 8 StabiliTrak Button If Equipped See StabiliTrak System on pag
384. re at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision For example if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night But if you are driving do not wear sunglasses at night They may cut down on glare from headlamps but they also make a lot of things invisible You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps It can take a second or two or even several seconds for your eyes to re adjust to the dark When you are faced with severe glare as from a driver who does not lower the high beams or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps slow down a little Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve Keep your eyes moving that way it is easier to pick out dimly lighted objects Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim so should your eyes be examined regularly Some drivers suffer from night blindness the inability to see
385. re first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque specifications Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign of brake trouble Brake Adjustment Every time you make a brake stop your disc brakes adjust for wear 5 43 Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality GM brake parts When you replace parts of your braking system for example when your brake linings wear down and you need new ones put in be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts If you do not your brakes may no longer work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle the balance between your front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance you have come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts Battery Your vehicle has a maint
386. re information on this including important safety information A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the air bag deploys 1 46 A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off General Motors recommends that rear facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off If you need to secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat position move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward facing child restraint See Power Seats on page 1 2 or Manual Passenger Seat on page 1 2 If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH system see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children LATCH System on page 1 41 There is no top strap anchor in the right front passenger s position Do not secure a child seat in this position if a national or local law requires that the top strap be anchored
387. rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your vehicle Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as far forward as possible and against the side rails making sure to fasten it securely Don t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle For more information on vehicle capacity and loading see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you re leaving check now and then to make sure the luggage and cargo are still securely fastened Be sure the cargo is properly loaded e If small heavy objects are placed on the roof cut a piece of 3 8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails and siderails to spread the load If plywood is used tie it to the siderail supports e Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail supports Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding To move the crossrails pull out on the latch release handle at each end Slide the crossrail to the desired position balancing the force side to side Push the release handle back into the latched position and slide the crossrail back and forth slightly to be sure the latch snaps securely into place e lf you need to carry long items move the crossrails as far apart as they will go Tie the load to the crossrails and the siderails or siderail supports Also tie the load to the bumpers Do not tie the load so tightly that the crossrails or siderails are damaged e After moving a crossrail be sure it is securely
388. rectly but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal When you move into an open area the signal should return Loading XM Acquiring channel audio The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text after 4 second delay data No action is needed This message should disappear shortly CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service Tune to another channel CH Unavail Channel no This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned longer available Tune to another station If this station was one of the presets choose another station for that preset button No Info Artist Name Feature No artist information is available at this time on this channel not available The system is working properly No Info Song Program Title No song title information is available at this time on this not available channel The system is working properly 3 82 XM Radio Messages cont d Radio Display No Info Category Name not No category information is available at this time on this available channel The system is working properly No Info No Text Informational No text or informational messages are available at this time message available on this channel The system is working properly Not Found No channel available for There are no channels available for the selected category the chosen category The system is working properly XM Locked Theft lock active The XM receiver in the vehicle m
389. red or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Do not use a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger s seat unless the airbag has been turned off Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Canada When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off for several seconds as a system check Then after several more seconds 3 32 If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger s frontal airbag See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 58 for more on this including important safety information If after several seconds all status indicator lights remain on or if there are no lights at all there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system See your dealer for service If the off indicator and the airbag readiness light ever come on together it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system If this ever happens have the vehicle serviced promptly because an adult size person sitting in the right front passenger seat may not have the protection of the frontal airbag See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 31 Charging System Light The charging system light will com
390. reful not to cover the sensor located on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield This sensor regulates air temperature based on sun load and also turns on your headlamps To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather the system will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available The length of delay depends on the engine coolant temperature Pressing the fan switch will override this delay and change the fan to a selected speed O Off Press this button to turn off the entire climate control system Outside air will still enter the vehicle and will be directed to the floor This direction can be changed by pressing the mode button The temperature can also be adjusted using either temperature knob Press the up or down arrows on the fan switch the defrost button the AUTO button or the air conditioning button to turn the system on when it is off Manual Operation You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or fan speed A amp V Fan The switch with the fan symbol allows you to manually adjust the fan speed Press the up arrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed Pressing this button when the system is off will turn the system on tol Mode Press this button to manually change the direction of the airflow in your vehicle Keep pressing the button until the desired mode appears on the display If you press the mode button to select an air delivery mode the display will chan
391. ress rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked 3 Grasp the seatback and pull it toward the front of A safety belt that is improperly routed not the vehicle Push it down until it is flat You may properly attached or twisted will not provide have to move the front seats forward slightly to the protection needed in a crash The person do this wearing the belt could be seriously injured 4 Repeat the procedure for the other side After raising the rear seatback always check To return the seats to the normal position pull the to be sure that the safety belts are properly seatback up and fold the seat cushion down routed and attached and are not twisted 1 8 Safety Belts Safety Belts They Are for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not wear a Safety belt properly If you are in a crash and you are not wearing a safety belt your injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passengers belts are fastened properly too It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be se
392. riously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 3 30 LZ In most states and in all Canadian provinces the law says to wear safety belts Here is why They work You never know if you will be in a crash If you do have a crash you do not know if it will be a bad one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person would not survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it is just a seat on wheels Put someone on it Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider does not stop The person keeps going until stopped by something In a real vehicle it could be the windshield or the instrument panel Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q Will be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if am wearing a safety be
393. rogram type NONE will appear on the display and the radio will return to the last station you were listening to SCAN Scan the stations within a PTY by performing the following 1 Press the TYPE button to activate program type select mode TYPE and the last selected PTY will appear on the display 2 Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the TYPE button to select a PTY 3 Once the desired PTY is displayed press and hold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for two seconds and the radio will begin scanning the stations in the PTY 4 Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop at a station BAND Alternate Frequency Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type To turn alternate frequency on press and hold BAND for two seconds AF ON will appear on the display The radio may switch to stations with a stronger frequency To turn alternate frequency off press and hold BAND again for two seconds AF OFF will appear on the display The radio will not switch to other stations This function does not apply for XM Satellite Radio Service 3 69 Setting Preset PTYs RDS Only These buttons have factory PTY presets Up to 12 PTYs six FM1 and six FM2 can be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons by performing the following steps 1 Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2 2 Press the TYPE button to activate program type select mode TYPE and the last selec
394. rol Liftgate PCM TCM TBC 2C Truck Body Controller TBC IGN 0 Truck Body Controller FLASH Flasher Module Vehicle and Trailer High Left Power Window Circuit LT TRLR ST TRN Left Turn Signal Stop Trailer TBC 2B Truck Body Controller TBC 2A Truck Body Controller 5 107 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block The center instrument panel utility block is located underneath the instrument panel to the left of the steering column 1 iz 1 T t 1 SEO 2 TRAILER 0 A UPFIT A SL RIDE A HDLNR 2 6 WAY 6 WAY 4 WAY 6 WAY 6 WAY A BLK A BRN CRM D GRY D CRM D HDLNR 1 A 12 WAY M BRN BODY 5 108 SEO TRAILER UPFIT SL RIDE HDLR 2 BODY DEFOG HDLNR 1 SPARE RELAY CB SEAT CB RT DOOR SPARE NFO Special Equipment Option Off road Lamps Harness Connector Trailer Brake Wiring Upfitter Not Used Ride Control Not Used Body Wiring Connector Rear Defogger Relay Headliner Wiring Connector 1 Headliner Wiring Connector 2 Not Used Driver and Passenger Seat Module Circuit Breaker Rear Right Power Window Passenger Door Module Not Used Not Used Underhood Fuse Block The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment on the driver s side of the vehicle near the battery Lift the cover for access to the fuse relay block To remove fuses hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out See Engine Compartm
395. rs and numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture E Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread F Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5 73 G Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load For information on recommended tire pressure see nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 67 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 SPEC 2012 M S TAGE 1207 XXP 77 s t e Dor EUo amp S oo OR Gy NG LOAD Sy ovanni Q ao me oF A 2s GF de AME AN A ry Fa S 87 7 Mp fa b maas Kosi OTe 0109 Light Truck LT Metric Tire A Tire Size The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more detail B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to G
396. rs reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders Your vehicle like other modern motor vehicles has a number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle s performance Your vehicle uses on board vehicle computers to monitor emission control components to optimize fuel economy to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and if so equipped to provide anti lock braking and to help the driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations Some information may be stored during regular operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions other information is stored only in a crash event by computer systems such as those commonly called event data recorders EDR In a crash event computer systems such as the Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module SDM in your vehicle may record information about the condition of the vehicle and how it was operated such as data related to engine speed brake application throttle position vehicle speed safety belt usage airbag readiness airbag performance and the severity of a collision If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak steering performance including yaw rate steering wheel angle and lateral accelera
397. s See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Wash Wax Concentrate Spot Lifter 5 103 Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number VIN SAMPLE4UX1M072675 LE4UX1M072 E This is the legal identifier for your vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver s side You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration 5 104 Engine Identification The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code This code will help you identify your engine specifications and replacement parts Service Parts Identification Label You will find this label on the inside of the glove box It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts On this label you will find the following e VIN e Model designation e Paint information e Production options and special equipment Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle Electrical System Notice Don t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn t be covered by your warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to add anything to your vehicle
398. s aaan a N a ae da A E 5 102 Underbody Maintenance ssssseesesrereernene 5 102 Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 5 103 VINY atese a e a a a 5 98 Washing Your Vehicle eeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 5 99 WeathersttipS serein teedsesssctantepeteeesecs dances 5 99 Windshield and Wiper Blades 5 5 100 ASH AS geroer tela E RE eles 3 19 Audio System S ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 3 64 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 5 3 102 Care of Your CD and DVD Player 3 104 Care of Your CDs and DVDs osaceae 3 104 Chime Level Adjustment eeeeeeeeee es 3 104 Fixed Mast Antenna cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 104 Audio System s cont Navigation Radio System ceeeeeeneeeeeees 3 100 Radio with CD siissrtsavmecsis dieehesiececdeedees 3 65 Radio with Six Disc CD cccceeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 75 Rear Seat Audio RSA ceeeeeeeeeneee tenes 3 100 Setting the TIME s cssccsaseccelecseseseseerieloceea 3 64 Theft Deterrent Feature eceeeeeneee ees 3 102 Understanding Radio Reception 3 103 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 104 Automatic Headlamp System 3 15 Automatic Transmission PUIG acted cont on E E E reeraeesen 5 25 Operation sies uinie a pe aaa 2 32 Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp Switch 3 17 Battery sorone eae eels 5 44 Run Down Protection
399. s below about 25 mph 40 km h If you leave your cruise control on when you If you apply your brakes the cruise control will shut off are not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot arive safely ata steady speed So do 1 Move the cruise control switch to on not use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic 2 Get up to the speed you want Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery 3 Press in the set button at the end of the lever and release it roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and you could lose control Do not use cruise control on slippery roads The cruise light on the y instrument panel will illuminate when the cruise control is engaged Resuming a Set Speed Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake This of course disengages the cruise control But you do not need to reset it Once you re going about 25 mph 40 km h or more you can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to resume accelerate You will go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there If you hold the switch at resume accelerate the vehicle will keep going f
400. s equipped with Starter Motor Control This feature assists in starting the engine and protects the electrical system This feature may cause the engine to crank even after the ignition key is not in START Move your shift lever to PARK P or NEUTRAL N Your engine will not start in any other position that is a safety feature To restart when you are already moving use NEUTRAL N only Notice Do not try to shift to PARK P if your vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to PARK P only when your vehicle is stopped 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition key to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm Notice Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will disengage the starter motor cause your battery to be drained much sooner and add excessive heat that can damage your starter motor Try not to hold the key in START for longer than 15 seconds and wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter 2 If it does not start within 10 seconds push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor while you hold the ignition key in START When the engine starts let go of the key and let up on the accelerator pedal Wait about 15 seconds between each try 2 29 When starting your engine in very cold weather below 0 F or 18 C do
401. s located in the overhead console To use the video screen push forward on the release latch and the screen will fold down Adjust the screen s position as desired When the video screen is not in use push it up into its latched position The DVD player and display will continue to operate when the screen is in the up or the down position The video screen contains the transmitters for the wireless headphones and the remote control If the screen is in the closed position the signals will not be available for the operation of the headphones or the remote control Notice Directly touching the video screen may damage it Do not touch the screen See Cleaning the Video Screen later in this section for more information DVD Player The DVD player is located in the overhead console The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the DVD player and or by the buttons on the remote control See Remote Control later in this section for more information 3 92 The DVD player power may be turned on when the ignition is in RUN ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the appropriate region code for the country that the vehicle was sold in The DVD region code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs Standard audio CDs CD R CD RW Video CD and Photo CD CD R media are fully supported by this DVD player DVD R and DVD RW media is supported if f
402. s recommended that your first service be Maintenance I your second service be Maintenance II and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter However in some cases Maintenance II may be required more often Maintenance I Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was performed Maintenance II Use Maintenance II if the previous service performed was Maintenance I Always use Maintenance II whenever the message comes on 10 months or more since the last service or if the message has not come on at all for one year Scheduled Maintenance Change engine oil and filter See Engine Oil on page 5 17 Reset oil life system See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 20 An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components See footnote ee eee Visually check for any leaks or damage See footnote j a o e Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator if equipped If necessary replace filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 22 An Emission Control Service See footnotes f and I Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear See Tires on page 5 61 Ooo e o e Inspect brake system See footnote a Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed Perform any needed additional services See Additional Required Services in this section Inspect suspension and
403. s to compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is outside zone eight Under certain circumstances as during a long distance cross country trip it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance Compass variance is the difference between earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If not adjusted to account for compass variance your compass could give false readings To adjust for compass variance 1 Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map 2 50 Press and hold the COMP button for five seconds until a zone number appears in the display Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror until the new zone number appears in the display After you stop pressing the button the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds Passenger Air Bag Indicator The mirror may be equipped with a passenger air bag indicator on the mirror glass just above the buttons If the vehicle has this feature the mirror will display the word ON or an airbag symbol in Canada when the passenger airbag is enabled See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 58 for more information Cleaning the Mirror Use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing Outside Camper Type Mirrors If your vehicle is equipped with outside camper type mirrors they
404. se steel brake tubing Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you ll want to get to know your rig Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself Before you start check all trailer hitch parts and attachments safety chains electrical connector lamps tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing You ll need more passing distance up ahead when you re towing a trailer And because you re a good deal longer you ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just m
405. series Rear Tire Flat If the flat tire is on a rear tire of the vehicle you ll need to use the jack handle C and both jack handle extensions D Attach the wheel wrench to the jack handle extensions Attach the jack handle to the jack On all 1500 Series vehicles use the jacking pad provided on the rear axle On 2500 series vehicles use the axle between the spring and shock bracket Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground 5 85 5 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel 4 Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts If you do the nuts might come loose Your wheel could fall off causing a serious accident Rust or dirt on the wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off 5 86 6 After mounting the spare put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel Tighten each wheel nut by hand Then use the
406. sing the on off button until the desired zone number appears in the display Release the button After approximately four seconds of inactivity the new zone number will be locked in and the compass temperature display will return 4 Calibrate the compass as described next Compass Calibration The compass may need calibration if one of the following occurs e After approximately five seconds the display does not show a compass heading N for North for example there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item e The compass does not display the correct heading and the compass zone variance is set correctly In order to calibrate CAL must be displayed in the mirror compass windows If CAL is not displayed push the on off button for approximately 12 seconds or until CAL is displayed The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in circles at 5 mph 8 km h or less until the display reads a direction 2 47 Passenger Air Bag Indicator The vehicle may be equipped with a passenger airbag indicator on the mirror glass just above the buttons For more information see Passenger Sensing System on page 1 58 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 32 Cleaning the Mirror When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray gl
407. start to move check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light Freeway Driving Mile for mile freeways also called thruways parkways expressways turnpikes or superhighways are the safest of all roads But they have their own special rules The most important advice on freeway driving is Keep up with traffic and keep to the right Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving Too fast or too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp you should begin to check traffic Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed Switch on your turn signal check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow Once you are on the freeway adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass Before changing lanes check your mirrors Then use your turn signal Just before you leave the lane glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in your blind spot 4 35 Once you are moving on the freeway make certain you allow a reasonable
408. steam coming from it Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when your engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 32 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency Notice If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 32 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine An overheat warning along with a low coolant condition can indicate a serious problem If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you e Climb a long hill on a hot day e Stop after high speed driving e Idle for long periods in traffic e Tow a trailer See Towing a Trailer on page 4 62 If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so 1 If your air conditioner is on turn it off 2 Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the wi
409. steering components See footnote b i Inspect engine cooling system See footnote c a ee Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service I or II after the indicated miles kilometers shown for each item Additional Required Services 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 83 000 125 000 166 000 207 500 240 000 25 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 41 500 Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components Vehicles without a filter restriction indicator Replace engine air cleaner filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 22 An Emission Control Service Change automatic transmission fluid and filter severe service See footnote h Change automatic transmission fluid and filter normal service Additional Required Services cont d 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 41 500 83000 125 000 166 000 207 500 240 000 Change transfer case fluid See footnote g Inspect evaporative control system An Emission Control Service See footnotes t and k Replace spark plugs and inspect spark plug wires An Emission Control Service Engine cooling system service or every 5 years whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote i Maintenance Footnotes t The U S Environmental Pr
410. straint System Check Checking Your Restraint Systems Now and then make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers and have them repaired or replaced The airbag system does not need regular maintenance 1 63 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible 1 64 If you have had a crash do you need new belts or LATCH system parts After a very minor collision nothing may be necessary But if the belts were stretched as they would be if worn during a more severe crash then you need new parts If the LATCH system was being used during a more severe crash you may need new LATCH system parts If belts are cut or damaged replace them Collisio
411. t gmmobility com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 Roadside Assistance Program As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle you are automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance program This value added service is intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive in the city or travel the open road Call Chevrolet s Roadside Assistance at 1 800 CHEV USA 1 800 243 8872 24 hours a day 365 days a year to speak with a Chevrolet Roadside Assistance representative We will provide the following services during the Bumper to Bumper warranty period at no expense to you e Fuel Delivery Delivery of enough fuel 5 maximum for the customer to get to the nearest service station e Lock out Service identification required Replacement keys or locksmith service will be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle Delivery of the replacement key will be covered within 10 miles 16 km e Emergency Tow Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty service or in the event of a vehicle disabling accident Assistance provided when the vehicle is mired in sand mud or snow e Flat Tire Change Installation of a spare tire will be covered at no charge The customer is responsible for the repair or repla
412. t deterrent system Here s how to do it 1 Open the door 2 Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter The security light should come on and stay on 3 Close all doors The security light should go off after about 30 seconds The alarm is not armed until the security light goes off 2 26 If a locked door is opened without the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter the alarm will go off The headlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes and the horn will sound for 30 seconds then will turn off to save the battery power You can choose different feedback options for the alarm See Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 45 Remember the theft deterrent system won t activate if you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door lock It activates only if you use a power door lock switch with the door open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off Here s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident e If you don t want to activate the theft deterrent system the vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doors are closed e Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote keyless entry transmitter Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm If you set off the alarm by accident unlock any door with the key
413. t gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough Notice Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hill use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place On cold days approximately 32 F 0 C or colder your transmission is designed to shift differently until the engine reaches normal operating temperature This is intended to improve heater performance Tow Haul Mode Your vehicle is equipped with a tow haul mode The button is located on the end of the column shift lever You can use this feature to assist when towing or hauling a heavy load See Tow Haul Mode under Towing a Trailer on page 4 62 for more information Four Wheel Drive If your vehicle has four wheel drive you can send your engine s driving power to all four wheels for extra traction To get the most satisfaction out of four wheel drive you must be familiar with its operation Read the part that follows before using four wheel drive See the appropriate text for the transfer case in your vehicle Notice Driving on clean dry pavement in four wheel drive for an extended period of time may cause premature wear on your vehicle s powertrain Do not drive on clean dry pavement in four wheel drive for extended periods of time Front Axle Locking Feature The front axle locks and unlocks automatically when
414. t speakers To adjust the fade between the front and the rear speakers push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears on the display Turn the knob to move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until the radio produces one beep The balance and fade will be adjusted to the middle position and the display will show the speaker balance To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed ALL CENTERED will appear on the display you will hear a beep and the display level will be adjusted to the middle position Finding a Program Type PTY Station RDS and XM To select and find a desired PTY perform the following 1 Press the TYPE button to activate program type select mode TYPE and a PTY will appear on the display 2 Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the TYPE button to select a PTY 3 Once the desired PTY is displayed press and release either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to select and to take you to the PTY s first station 4 To go to another station within that PTY and the PTY is displayed press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows once If the PTY is not displayed go back to Step 1 5 Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to exit program type select mode If the radio cannot find the desired p
415. t the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes suspension or other vehicle parts The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions To help avoid damage to your vehicle drive slowly readjust or remove the device if it s contacting your vehicle and don t spin your wheels If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the rear tires 5 76 Notice If your vehicle is a 2500 Series use tire chains only where legal and only when you must Use chains that are the proper size for your tires Install them on the tires of the rear axle Don t use chains on the tires of the front axle Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer s instructions If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle stop and retighten them If the contact continues slow down until it stops Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle If a Tire Goes Flat It s unusual for a tire to blowout while you re driving especially if you maintain your tires properly If air goes out of a tire it s much more likely to leak out slowly But i
416. t this procedure at least two times If the spare tire lowers to the ground continue with Step 5 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 79 5 Turn the wrench counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches 15 cm of cable is exposed 6 Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends with the backs facing each other 7 Place the bottom edge of the jack A on the wheel blocks B separating them so that the jack is balanced securely 5 90 8 Attach the jack handle extension and wheel wrench to the jack and place it with the wheel blocks under the vehicle towards the front of the rear bumper 9 10 11 12 Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the end fitting Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place The secondary latch has released and the spare tire is balancing on the jack Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the cable Someone standing too close during the procedure could be injured by the jack If the spare tire does not slide off the jack completely make sure no one is behind you or on either side of you as you pull the jack out from the spare 13 Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and carefully remove th
417. t to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil on page 5 17 for further details Notice It is important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level Failure to keep your engine oil at the proper level can cause damage to your engine not covered by your warranty Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant on page 5 28 for further details Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures Do not forget to check your spare tire See Tires on page 5 61 for further details Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to turn the spare tire If it moves tighten it See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 78 At Least Once a Year Starter Switch Check When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake See Parking Brake on page 2 40 if necessary Do not use t
418. t will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h and the transmission is in NEUTRAL N After 30 seconds the transfer case will shift to 4HI mode 2 38 Shifting Out of 4LO To shift from 4LO to 4HI AUTO 4WD or 2HI your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N and the ignition in RUN The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Press and release the 4HI AUTO 4WD or 2HI button You must wait for the 4HI AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear Notice Shifting the transmission into gear before the 4LO indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case To help avoid damaging your vehicle always wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing before shifting the transmission into gear It is typical for your vehicle to exhibit significant engagement noise and bump when shifting between 4LO and 4HI ranges or from NEUTRAL with the engine running If the 4HI AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the 4HI AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h and the transmission is in NEUTRAL N Shifting into NEUTRAL
419. tached to the jack E by turning the wing nut C counterclockwise Place the wheel blocks where needed as indicated in the previous caution N 5 79 The tools for changing a flat tire are located in the passenger s side top box storage unit To remove the tools do the following 1 Open the top door on the passenger s side top box storage unit Use the ignition door key to unlock it if it is locked See Top Box Storage on page 2 77 for more information Top box storage unit passenger s side 2 Remove the black pouch from the storage box You now have all of the tools you will need to lower the spare tire and change a flat 5 80 You ll use the jack handle extensions and the wheel wrench to remove the underbody mounted spare tire mmo w Spare Tire G Hoist Shaft Valve Stem Access Hole Pointed Down H Wheel Wrench Hoist Assembly Jack Handle Hoist Cable Extensions Tire Retainer J Hoist Lock If Hoist Shaft Equipped Hoist End of Extension Tool Follow these instructions to lower the spare tire 1 Your vehicle may be equipped with a hoist lock J Open the spare tire lock cover on the bumper and use the ignition key to remove the lock 2 Assemble the wheel wrench H and the two jack handle extensions l as shown 3 Insert the hoist end open end F of the extension through the hole G in the rear bumper Be sure the hoist end of the extension connects to the
420. tal vehicle reserve capacity for your vehicle can be found in the lower right corner of the Certification Tire label as shown previously See your dealer for additional advice and information about using a snow plow on your vehicle Also see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 4 55 Towing Towing Your Vehicle Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motorhome see Recreational Vehicle Towing following Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground and dolly towing towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly 4 56 With the proper preparation and equipment many vehicles can be towed in these ways See Dinghy Towing and Dolly Towing following Here are some important things to consider before you do recreational vehicle towing e What s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer s recommendations e How far will you tow Some vehicles have restricti
421. tart the engine If the light remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the Light Is On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle If so reinstall the fuel cap making sure to fully install the cap See Filling Your Tank on page 5 9 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water If so your electrical system may be wet The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off Have you recently changed brands of fuel If so be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed You may notice this as stalling after start up stalling when you put the vehicle into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on If you
422. ted PTY will appear on the display 3 Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the TYPE button to select a PTY 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever that numbered pushbutton is pressed the PTY that was set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton RDS Messages INFO Information If the current station has a message the information symbol will appear on the display Press this button to see the message The message may display the artist song title call in phone numbers etc 3 70 If the entire message is not displayed parts of the message will appear every three seconds To scroll through the message press and release the INFO button A new group of words will appear on the display after every press of the button Once the complete message has been displayed the information symbol will disappear from the display until another new message is received The last message can be displayed by pressing the INFO button You can view the last message until a new message is received or a different station is tuned to Radio Messages CAL ERR Calibration Error The audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory If CAL ERR appears on the display it means that the radio has not been configured properly for the vehicle and must be returned to your GM dealer for service LOCKED This message is displayed when the THEFTLOCK system has locked up
423. tended periods of time may cause fogging of the vehicle s windows To clear the fog select either defog or front defrost You may also notice that the A C compressor will run while in recirculation mode This is normal and helps to prevent fogging 4 Air Conditioning Press this button to turn the air conditioning A C compressor on and off The snowflake symbol will appear on the display when the A C is on and will turn off when the air conditioning is off Pressing this button when the outside temperature is too cool for air conditioning to be effective will make the snowflake symbol flash three times and then turn off to let you know that the air conditioning mode is not available If the air conditioning is on and the outside temperature drops below a temperature which is too cool for air conditioning to be effective the snowflake symbol will turn off to let you know that the air conditioning mode has been canceled When air conditioning is selected or in AUTO mode the system will run the air conditioning automatically to cool and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle If you select A C off while in front defrost defog or recirculation the A C snowflake symbol will turn off but the A C compressor will still run to help prevent fogging 3 26 On hot days open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape This reduces the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down Then keep your windows closed for the air co
424. ter crossing your vehicle can be carried away As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle If this happens you and other vehicle occupants could drown Do not ignore police warning signs and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water Some Other Rainy Weather Tips e Turn on your low beam headlamps not just your parking lamps to help make you more visible to others e Besides slowing down allow some extra following distance And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle Allow yourself more clear room ahead and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray e Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires on page 5 61 4 33 City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them You will want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals 4 34 Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving Know the best way to get to where you are going Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross country trip Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities You will save time and energy See Freeway Driving on page 4 35 Treat a green light as a warning signal A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it When a light turns green and just before you
425. tes ccsvevcessaseceasciveeeceaevens ii Park P Shifting IMO seasea a 2 41 Shifting Out OF ern escie inini eecetaredeneeecssceene 2 43 Parking Brak cree 2s i meecactes arnt E E accede 2 40 Over Things That Burn ccceeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 2 43 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 3 32 Passenger Sensing System ceseeeeeeeneee ees 1 58 PASSING eiei arar eae cadet ioe deddacstne sala aei 4 15 PasSlOCk gt oann meann dinadar uee E N itera 2 27 Power Accessory Outlets cceceeeeeeeeeeeee een eeaes 3 19 DOOM MOCKS ai ea sent r A 2 9 Electrical System esii ieria eise eiae 5 105 Lumbar Controls cceceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 1 3 Retained Accessory RAP ccccccceecece 2 29 SC al x eccsedastesculees EEES 1 2 Steering Fluid ceeeeeeeee eee eee eee eee eee een eees 5 38 WINGOWS 222i cedernc er cies use wasabi setts enaa 2 25 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 10 Programming the HomeLink Transmitter 2 57 Q Questions and Answers About Safety Belts 1 13 FRAGIOS chascar ee irrena ea aaa 3 64 Care of Your CD and DVD Player 3 104 Care of Your CDs and DVDs 0 3 104 Navigation Radio System 0 ceeeeeneeeeenes 3 100 Radio with CD siessen eonenna 3 65 Radio with Six Disc CD ceceeeeeeeeeeeee eee 3 75 Rear Seat Audio crimo esisaenis ceneri han 3 100 Setting the Time cccecee
426. than one child restraint to a single bracket could cause the anchor to come loose or even break during a crash A child or others could be injured if this happens To help prevent injury to people and damage to your vehicle attach only one child restraint per bracket Once you have the top strap anchored you will be ready to secure the child restraint itself Tighten the top strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer s instructions say 1 40 Top Strap Anchor Location 60 40 Split Rear Seat Folded An anchor loop bracket for a top strap is located on the back of the rear seat frame above the floor for each rear seating position In order to get to the brackets you will have to fold the rear seatback s See Rear Seat Operation on page 1 7 for information on folding the rear seatbacks Do not secure a child restraint in the right front passenger s position if a national or local law requires that the top strap be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored There is no place to anchor the top strap in this position Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children LATCH System Your vehicle has the LATCH system You will find anchors in the center and right side passenger second row seating positions This system designed to make installation of child restraints easier does not use the vehicle s safety belts Instead it uses ve
427. the button while the defogger is running can also turn off the defogger If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors this button will activate them Notice Don t use anything sharp on the inside of the rear window If you do you could cut or damage the warming grid and the repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty Do not attach a temporary vehicle license tape a decal or anything similar to the defogger grid 3 22 Dual Automatic Climate Control System With this system you can control the heating cooling and ventilation in your vehicle You can select different climate control settings for the driver and passengers Driver s Side Temperature Knob The drivers side knob is used to adjust the temperature of the air coming through the system on the driver s side The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off This is possible since outside air will always flow through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode See Recirculation later in this section Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or increase the cabin temperature The display will show the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and an arrow pointing to the driver will be displayed under and to the left of the temperature setting Passenger s Side Temperature Knob The passenger s side knob can be used to change the temperature of the air coming through
428. the fluid level be low during this cold check you must check the fluid hot before adding fluid Checking the fluid hot will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level Checking the Fluid Level Prepare your vehicle as follows e Park your vehicle on a level place Keep the engine running e With the parking brake applied place the shift lever in PARK P 5 26 e With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then position the shift lever in PARK P e Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more Then without shutting off the engine follow these steps Sat See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for more information on location The transmission dipstick handle with this graphic is located at the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle 1 Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 2 Push it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again au Ea 3 Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level The fluid level must be in the COLD area below the cross hatched area for a cold check or in the HOT or cross hatched area for a hot check Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an accurate reading 4 If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick b
429. the water management system performs properly be sure that the midgate tailgate and cover system are fully closed and that each element of the water management system is clean and not blocked with debris Follow the instruction given next in this section for the proper procedures on cleaning each item of the water management system A Top drain grates B Removable front drain grate Midgate drain gate C Side rail channels and catch cups 2 73 Top Drain Grates Removal and Cleaning 2 Grasp the edges of the grate and pull it out from the vehicle Flush the drain with clean water The top drain grates are located near the rear glass on both sides of the vehicle You may need to clean the grates and drains if there seems to be blockage To remove each drain grate do the following 1 Remove the cargo panels or tonneau cover See Cargo Cover Panels on page 2 62 or Tonneau Cover on page 2 78 for more information 2 74 To replace the drain grate do the following 1 Line up the clips on the vehicle with the slots in the grate 2 When you are sure that the clips are aligned with the slots push the grate down firmly The grate should clip into place Don t force the grate if it won t clip into place realign the clips with the holes and try again Side Rail Channels The side rail channels are located on top of both sides of the cargo area You may w
430. the window Express Down Windows The driver and front passenger windows also have an express down feature that allows the windows to be lowered without holding the switch Press down fully on the window switch then release to activate the express down mode This mode can be canceled at any time by pulling up on the switch To open the window partway press the switch to the first position until the window is at the desired position Window Lockout Press the lockout switch to prevent passengers from operating the power windows from their switches A light in the lockout switch will come on to show that the switch has been activated Press the lockout switch again to return to normal operation Sun Visors To block out glare you can swing down the visors You can also swing them out to help block glare at the front and side windows Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors Pull the sunvisor down and lift the mirror cover to turn on the lamps 2 25 Theft Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal Content Theft Deterrent Your vehicle is equipped with a content theft deterrent alarm system With this system the security light in the instrument panel cluster will flash as you open the door if your ignition is off This light reminds you to activate the thef
431. there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs Newborn infants need complete support including support for the head and neck This is necessary because a newborn infant s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant ina rear facing seat settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants always should be secured in appropriate infant restraints 1 34 The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child for whom the safety belts are designed A young child s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries Young children always should be secured in appropriate child restraints Child Restraint Systems A rear facing infant seat B provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant The An infant car bed A a special bed made for use in a harness system holds the infant in place and in a crash motor vehicle is an infant restraint system designed acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint to restrain or
432. this 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition key to START and hold it there up to 15 seconds When the engine starts let go of the key 2 If your engine still will not start or starts but then stops it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for about three seconds When the engine starts let go of the key and accelerator If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again do the same thing but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds This clears the extra gasoline from the engine Notice Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer If you do not your engine might not perform properly 2 30 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal If your vehicle has this feature you can change the position of the throttle and brake pedals This feature is designed for shorter drivers since the pedals cannot move farther away from the standard position but can move closer to you for better pedal reach This feature can be programmed to work with the memory function if equipped on your vehicle See Memory Seat on page 2 85 The vehicle must be in PARK P for this feature to operate 2 The buttons used to adjust t
433. this button is pressed See Rear Window Defogger under Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3 22 for more information Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb View Assist Your vehicle may have this feature The driver s outside mirror will adjust for the glare of the headlamps behind you See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar Compass and Temperature Display on page 2 45 Your vehicle s mirrors will also be capable of performing the curb view assist mirror function This feature will cause the passenger s and or driver s mirror to tilt to a preselected position when the vehicle is in REVERSE R This feature may be useful in allowing you to view the curb when you are parallel parking When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE R anda short delay has occurred the passenger s and or driver s mirror will return to its original position To change the preselected tilt position adjust the mirrors to the desired position while the vehicle is in REVERSE R When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE R this new position is saved in memory as the tilt position This feature can be enabled disabled through the Driver Information Center See Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 45 for more information 2 53 OnStar System OnStar uses global positioning system GPS satellite technology wireless communications and call centers to provide you with a wide range of safety sec
434. tion is also recorded This information has been used to improve vehicle crash performance and may be used to improve crash performance of future vehicles and driving safety Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes these on board systems do not record sounds such as conversation of vehicle occupants To read this information special equipment is needed and access to the vehicle or the device that stores the data is required GM will not access information about a crash event or share it with others other than e with the consent of the vehicle owner or if the vehicle is leased with the consent of the lessee e in response to an official request of police or similar government office e as part of GM s defense of litigation through the discovery process or e as required by law In addition once GM collects or receives data GM may e use the data for GM research needs e make it available for research where appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained and need is shown or e share summary data which is not tied to a specific vehicle with non GM organizations for research purposes Others such as law enforcement may have access to the special equipment that can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the device that stores the data If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar please check the OnStar subscription service agreement or manual for information on its operations and data
435. tion should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power You can only drive for a short time with the reading in either warning zone If you must drive turn off all unnecessary accessories Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible Brake System Warning Light With the ignition on the brake system warning light will flash when you set the parking brake The light will flash if the parking brake doesn t release fully If you try to drive with the parking brake engaged a chime will sound when the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph 5 km h Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part isn t working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there could be a brake problem Have your brake system OG O BRAKE United States This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If it doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there s a problem If the light comes on while you are driving pull off the road and stop carefully You may notice that the pedal is harder to push or may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See
436. tment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Tighten the screw to close the compartment door If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place Stereo RCA Jacks The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen The RCA jacks allow audio and video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system Standard RCA cables not included are needed to connect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks The yellow connector inputs video and the red and white connectors input right and left audio Refer to the manufacturer s instructions for proper connection of the auxiliary device To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system connect an external auxiliary device to the color coded RCA jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the RSE system power on If the RSE system had been previously in the DVD player mode pressing the SRCE button on the faceplate or the remote control will switch the RSE system between the auxiliary device and the DVD player How to Change the Video Format when in the Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC In some countries the video format may be in the PAL system To change the video format perform the following 1 Press the display menu button 2 Press the down arrow butto
437. to free it It may also be necessary to turn off the system when driving in extreme off road conditions where high wheel spin is required See f You Are Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 44 Traction Control Operation The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak system Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine power to the wheels engine speed management and by applying brakes to each individual wheel brake traction control as necessary The traction control system is enabled automatically when you start your vehicle and it will activate and display the TRACTION ACTIVE message in the Driver Information Center DIC if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving If you turn off StabiliTrak only the brake traction control portion of traction control will work The engine speed management will be disabled In this state engine power is not reduced automatically and the driven wheels can spin more freely This can cause the brake traction control to activate constantly For more information on the traction active message see Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 45 Notice If the traction off light comes on due to heavy braking and or because the traction control system has been continuously active do not allow the wheel s of one axle to spin excessively If you do you may be causing damage to the transfer case This could lead to costly repairs
438. to respond to one shift per 10 seconds The transfer case may stay in this mode for up to three minutes 2 39 Parking Brake To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot A chime will activate and the warning light will flash when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at least 3 mph 5 km h for at least three seconds RY To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down Pull the bottom edge of the lever located above the parking brake pedal with the parking brake symbol to release the parking brake 2 40 If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released the brake system warning light will go off Notice Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts Verify that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill see Towing a Trailer on page 4 62 Shifting Into Park P It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground use the steps that follow
439. tors garage door openers entry door locks security systems and home lighting Additional HomeLink information can be found on the Internet at www homelink com or by calling 1 800 355 3515 2 56 If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink Transmitter it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes and modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Programming the HomeLink Transmitter Do not use the HomeLink Transmitter with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 If you have a newer garage door opener with rolling codes please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete the programming of your HomeLink Transmitter Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the HomeLink Transmitter Because of the steps
440. trailer wiring package Use this adapter to connect a standard four way round pin connector to the seven wire harness on your vehicle 4 73 Connect the adapter with the tab pointing up Then flip cap on the vehicle s seven wire harness will lock onto the tab and help hold the adapter in place Plug the four way round pin connector onto the adapter Auxiliary Battery The auxiliary battery provision if equipped can be used to supply electrical power to additional equipment that you may choose to add 4 74 If your vehicle has this provision this relay will be located on the passenger s side of the vehicle next to the auxiliary battery When using this provision connection should only be made to the upper stud A of the relay Do not make connections to the lower stud B of the relay The auxiliary battery circuit is protected by a megafuse located behind the auxiliary battery Be sure to follow the proper installation instructions that are included with any electrical equipment that you install Notice Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods will drain the battery Always turn off electrical equipment when not in use and do not use equipment that exceeds the maximum amperage rating for the auxiliary battery provision Section 5 Service and Appearance Care SEVICE cianie gee edneetneedeeatin esse htenenaecbetercets 5 3 EngineFan NOIS Enaisi 5 37 Doing Your Own Service Work secse
441. try to eject the CD several times before stopping Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a CD after you have tried to push it in manually The players 25 second eject timer will reset at each press of eject causing the player to not eject the CD until the 25 second time period has elapsed lt REV Reverse Press and hold this button to reverse quickly within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release the button to play the passage The elapsed time of the track will appear on the display FWD gt Forward Press and hold this button to advance quickly within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release the button to play the passage The elapsed time of the track will appear on the display 3 85 RPT Repeat With repeat one track or an entire CD can be repeated To use repeat do the following e To repeat the track you are listening to press and release the RPT button RPT will appear on the display Press RPT again to turn off repeat play e To repeat the CD you are listening to press and hold the RPT button for two seconds RPT will appear on the display Press RPT again to turn off repeat play RDM Random With random you can listen to the tracks in random rather than sequential order on one CD or on all of the CDs To use random do one of the following e To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in random order press and release the RDM button RANDOM O
442. ts Canadian Government 0 ceseeeeeeeeeeeenes 7 11 General Motors ccecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 11 United States Government eceeeeeee eee 7 10 Restraint System Check Checking Your Restraint Systems 1 63 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash 0 cccccceccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 1 64 Restraint Systems CHECKING sieneen an 1 63 Replacing Parts sic ciecccciciadedectececiie seu danais 1 64 Retained Accessory Power RAP ccecce 2 29 Right Front Passenger Position Safety Belts 1 22 Roadside Assistance Program 2 scceeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeee 7 6 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 4 44 Running Your Engine While You Are Parked 2 44 Safety Belt Reminder iQhtiscvisccc s sieacniadiachsetesteadies atectese 3 30 Safety Belts Care Of csedselastyoediscrveedeceieeneelaeiemedacdsveeeies 5 99 Center Front Passenger Position 0 00 1 22 Driver POSIION 3 cicisscathopndecnkeet desman pane canner 1 14 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 14 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts 1 13 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults 0cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 26 Rear Seat Passengers cceeeeeeeeeneeeeee ees 1 23 Right Front Passenger Position 0 1 22 Safety Belt Extender ccceceeeeeeeeeee teens 1 28 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
443. ts in the wintertime the E 85 fuel must be formulated properly for your climate according to ASTM specification D 5798 If you have trouble starting on E 85 it may be because your E 85 fuel is not properly formulated for your climate If this happens switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to your fuel tank may improve starting Your vehicle is designed to accommodate a mixture of gasoline and E 85 fuel For good starting and heater efficiency below 32 F 0 C the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain no more than 70 ethanol E 85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline so you will need to refill your fuel tank more often when using E 85 than when you are using gasoline Regular unleaded gasoline is recommended when pulling a trailer For payload capacity with ethanol fuel see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 46 Notice Some additives are not compatible with E 85 fuel and may harm your fuel system Damage caused by additives would not be covered by your new vehicle warranty Do not use additives with E 85 fuel Notice Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage the plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under your warranty Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel may be hard to find Never use leaded
444. tside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least once a year d Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield e Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also look for any opened or broken airbag coverings and have them repaired or replaced The airbag system does not need regular maintenance f Lubricate all key lock cylinders hood latch assembly secondary latch pivots spring anchor release pawl midgate hinges side storage box door hinges tailgate hinges tailgate linkage outer tailgate handle pivot points latch bolt fuel door hinge locks and folding seat hardware More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak g Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation h Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where t
445. ture returns to normal the CD should play e You are driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smoother the CD should play e The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down e The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again There may have been a problem while burning the CD e The label may be caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your GM dealer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your GM dealer when reporting the problem Radio with Six Disc CD So DD OMD Ge UPDATE Base Radio Shown Bose Similar If your vehicle has the Bose audio system your vehicle will have six Bose amplified speakers 3 75 Radio Data System RDS The audio system has a Radio Data System RDS RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information With RDS the radio can do the following e Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming e Receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies e Display messages from radio stations This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and will only work when the information is available In rare cases a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work
446. u and hold it there while you perform the next step 2 Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice Then with the key in LOCK release the turn signal multifunction lever Once you do this the doors will lock and unlock the horn will chirp twice and a 30 second timer will begin You are now ready to program the automatic door unlock feature 3 Press the unlock side of the power lock switch once You will hear one two three or four chimes The number of chimes tells you which unlock mode is currently selected Continue to press the door unlock switch until the number of chimes that you hear matches the number of the mode that you want If you take longer than 30 seconds the locks will automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have left the program mode If this occurs you can repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1 to re enter the programming mode You can exit the program mode any time by turning the ignition to RUN The doors will automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you are leaving the program mode If the lock unlock switches are not pressed while in the programming mode the current automatic settings will not be modified Rear Door Security Locks With this feature you can lock the rear doors so they can t be opened from the inside by passengers This feature is located on the inside edge of the rear doors a aii Cw To use the locks
447. u continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you should file with the BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1838 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program Online Owner
448. um number of occupants multiplied by 150 Ib 68 kg use xx PSI xx kPa Cold front and rear with L1T245 75R16E tires See Owner s Manual for more information i An example of the Improved Ride label is shown here POUR AMELIORER LA CONDUITE Avec une charge l g re la charge maximale de 91 kg au 200 Ib et le poids total des occupants doivent tre infetieurs au nombre maximal occupants multipli par 68 kg ou 150 Ib 3 5 gonfler les pneus LT245 75R16E avant et arri re 7 xx PSI ou xx kPa froid Voir le Guide du propri taire pour plus d information JE This label is attached to the lower section of the driver s door edge for 2500 Series vehicles only Operating your vehicle with a light load means e The total weight of occupants in your vehicle is less than the total seating capacity number your vehicle was designed to carry multiplied by 150 lbs 68 kg The total seating capacity number is on the Tire and Loading Information label e No more than 200 Ibs 91 kg of cargo which must be secured in the cargo area e No trailer is attached to your vehicle e You have not added any additional equipment to your vehicle like a truck cap or tool box The vehicle load capacity and the rear axle load capacity are reduced when the tire pressure is lowered to the amount recommended for improved ride Before operating your vehicle with passengers or cargo greater than a light load you must inflate t
449. unction will vary for each disc _ Subtitle Press this button to turn on subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function will vary for each disc gt Fast Forward Press this button to fast forward the DVD or CD To stop fast forwarding press this button again This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews gt Play Pause Press this button to start play of a DVD or CD Press this button while a DVD or CD is playing to pause it Press this button again to continue the play of the DVD or CD When the DVD is playing press the pause button then press the fast forward button The DVD will continue playing in a slow play mode To cancel slow play mode press the play pause button gt Next Track Chapter Press this button to advance to the beginning of the next track or chapter This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews Battery Replacement To change the batteries do the following 1 Remove the battery compartment door located on the bottom of the remote control 2 Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Close the battery door securely If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in
450. unlight may damage it and the repairs would not be covered by your warranty Keep the remote control stored in a cool dry place To extend the life of the batteries the remote control does not have a press and hold feature Remote Control Buttons Q Power Press this button to turn the DVD player on and off ba Title Press this button to return the DVD to the main menu of the DVD A W lt Menu Navigation Arrows Use the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu _ Set up Menu Press this button to adjust the color tint brightness contrast display mode and dynamic range compression The dynamic range compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio and increase low audio produced by some DVDs d Audio Press this button to display a menu that will only appear when a DVD is being played The format and content of this function will vary for each disc A Fast Reverse Press this button to fast reverse the DVD or CD To stop fast reversing press this button again This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews SRCE Source Press this button to switch between the DVD player and an auxiliary source E Stop Press this button to stop playing rewinding or fast forwarding a DVD or CD Press this button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD a Previous Track Chapter Press this button to return to the start of the current track or chapt
451. until you reach the recommended amount If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture Improved Ride with Light Load 2500 Series Vehicles Only Do not overload your vehicle or underinflate the tires Overloading your vehicle or underinflating the tires can cause rapid loss of pressure and cause a serious crash Only use reduced rear tire pressure when your vehicle meets the criteria for a light load If you have a 2500 Series vehicle with LT245 75R16E size tires and you are operating your vehicle under light load conditions you can improve ride quality by adjusting both the front and rear cold tires to the recommended pressure shown on the Improved Ride label T Overloading your vehicle or underinflating your tires can cause rapid loss of pressure and a serious crash Only use reduced rear tire pressure when you meet the criteria for a light load Un v hicule surcharg ou des pneus sous gonfl s peut entrainer une perte rapide de pression et causer un accident R duisez la pression des pneus arri re seulement lorsque vous r pondez aux crit res se rapportant une charge l g re FOR IMPROVED RIDE With a light load cargo no more than 200 Ib 91 kg and total occupant weight less than maxim
452. ur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This part is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and babies If a child will be riding in your vehicle see Older Children on page 1 29 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 32 Follow those rules for everyone s protection First you will want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has We will start with the driver position 1 14 Driver Position Lap Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap shoulder belt Here is how to wear it properly 1 Close and lock the door 2 Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index 3 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let it get twisted 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 1 28 Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 5 To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt WO Ss 4 The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touch
453. ur some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth and gently wipe the video screen Do not spray directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or too long on the video screen Navigation Radio System Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system that includes Radio Data System RDS with Program Type PTY selections that will seek out the kind of music you want to listen to and XM Satellite Radio Service capabilities if equipped The radio can also communicate with the navigation system to broadcast announcements on traffic weather and emergency alert communications For information on how to use this system see the Navigation System manual 3 100 Rear Seat Audio RSA This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any of the sources radio CDs or DVDs However the rear seat passengers can only control the sources that the front seat passengers are not listening to For example rear seat passengers may listen to and control CDs or DVDs through the headphones while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones The front seat audio controls always have priority over the RSA controls If the front seat passengers switch the source for the main radio to a remote source the RSA will not be able to control the source You can operate the rear seat audio when the main radio is off Cy Power Press t
454. ur vehicle To identify the vehicle trailering capacity of your vehicle you should read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section If yours was built with trailering options as many are it s ready for heavier trailers But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling acceleration braking durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly That s the reason for this part In it are many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do here are some important points e There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure your rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you ll be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police e Consider using a sway control See Hitches later in this section e Don t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 800 km your new vehicle is driven Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged e Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer don t drive over 50 mph 80 km h and don t make starts at full throttle
455. urchased through your dealer Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle any remaining transmitters must also be matched Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters matched to it Battery Replacement Under normal use the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about two years You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not work at the normal range in any location If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works it is probably time to change the battery Notice When replacing the battery use care not to touch any of the circuitry Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter Resynchronization do the following Resynchronization may be necessary due to the security method used by this system The transmitter does not send the same signal twice to the receiver The receiver will not respond to a signal that has been sent previously This prevents anyone from recording and playing back the signal from the transmitter To resynchronize your transmitter stand close to your vehicle and press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the transmitter at the same time for 15 s
456. urity information and convenience services A complete OnStar user s guide and the terms and conditions of the OnStar Subscription Service Agreement are included in the vehicle s glove box literature For more information visit www onstar com or www onstarcanada com Contact OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 or press the OnStar button to speak to an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day 7 days a week Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be found at www onstar com or www onstarcanada com OnStar Services For new vehicles equipped with OnStar the Safe and Sound Plan is included for the first year You can extend this plan beyond the first year or upgrade to the Directions and Connections Plan to meet your needs For more information press the OnStar button to speak to an advisor 2 54 Safe and Sound Plan Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment Emergency Services Roadside Assistance Stolen Vehicle Tracking AccidentAssist Remote Door Unlock Vehicle Alert Remote Diagnostics Information and Convenience Services Online Concierge Directions and Connections Plan All Safe and Sound Plan Services Driving Directions RideAssist Information and Convenience Services OnStar Personal Calling As an OnStar subscriber the Personal Calling capability is available if your hand held cell phone is lost forgotten or has a low battery It is a hands free wireless phon
457. ushbutton to go to the next track TRACK and the track number will appear on the display If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than once the player will continue moving forward through the CD 3 REV Reverse Press and hold this pushbutton to quickly reverse within a track Press and hold this pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at six times the normal playing speed Press and hold it for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the normal playing speed Release this pushbutton to play the passage ET and the elapsed time of the track will appear on the display 3 73 4 FWD Forward Press and hold this pushbutton to quickly advance within a track Press and hold this pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six times the normal playing speed Press and hold it for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the normal playing speed Release this pushbutton to play the passage ET and the elapsed time of the track will appear on the display 6 RDM Random Press this pushbutton to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order RDM ON will appear on the display RDM T and the track number will appear on the display when each track starts to play Press this pushbutton again to turn off random play RDM OFF will appear on the display Ki SEEK D Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current or to the previous track Press the right arrow to go to the start of the next trac
458. ut this is normal Braking in Emergencies With anti lock you can steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help you more than even the very best braking Traction Assist System TAS Your vehicle may have a Traction Assist System TAS that limits wheel spin This is especially useful in slippery road conditions The system operates only if it senses that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction When this happens the system reduces engine power to limit wheel spin The TRACTION ACTIVE message will come on in the DIC when the TAS is limiting wheel spin See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 You may hear or feel the system working or notice a lack of accelerator response but this is normal The Traction Assist System may operate on dry roads under some conditions When this happens you may notice a reduction in acceleration This is normal and doesn t mean there s a problem with your vehicle Examples of these conditions include a hard acceleration in a turn an abrupt upshift or downshift of the transmission or driving on rough roads If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TAS begins to limit wheel spin the cruise control will automatically disengage When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may re engage the cruise control See Cruise Control on page 3 10 When the traction off light is on the TAS is off and will not limit wh
459. ve to add anything to your fuel However some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U S Environmental Protection Agency regulations General Motors recommends that you buy gasolines that are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean If your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves try a different brand of gasoline Also your GM dealer has additives that will help correct and prevent most deposit related problems Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier Notice Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage the plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under your warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system may be affected The malfunction indicato
460. vehicle be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear and not in NEUTRAL N Release the regular brakes It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground use the steps that follow Always put the shift lever fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set If the transfer case on four wheel drive vehicles is in NEUTRAL your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P So be sure the transfer case is ina drive gear not in NEUTRAL When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you e start your engine e shift into a gear and e release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you re pulling a trailer See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid don t overfill engine oil axle lubricant belts cooling system and brake system Each of these is covere
461. vehicle is off Fuel Information Button i Fuel Information Press the fuel information button to scroll through the range fuel used average fuel economy and the engine oil life system Fuel Range Press the fuel information button until RANGE appears on the display This mode shows the remaining distance you can drive without refueling It is based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in the tank The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is an average of recent driving conditions As your driving conditions change this data is gradually updated Fuel range cannot be reset Fuel Used Press the fuel information button until FUEL USED appears on the display This mode shows the number of gallons or liters of fuel used since the last reset of this menu item To reset the fuel used information press and hold the select button for one second while FUEL USED is displayed 3 47 Average Fuel Economy Press the fuel information button until AVG ECON appears on the display This mode shows how many miles per gallon MPG or liters per 100 kilometers L 100 km your vehicle is getting based on current and past driving conditions Press and hold the select button for one second while AVG ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel economy Average fuel economy will then be calculated starting from that point If the average fuel economy is not reset it will be cont
462. ver to lock the wheel in place Cruise Control Cruise Control on page 3 10 For information on the exterior lamps see Exterior Lamps on page 3 14 later in this section Turn and Lane Change Signals The turn signal has two upward for right and two downward for left positions These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change To signal a turn move the lever all the way up or down When the turn is finished the lever will return automatically To signal a lane change just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash Hold it there until you complete your lane change The lever will return by itself when you release it An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change As you signal a turn or a lane change if the arrows flash more quickly than normal a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won t see your turn signal If a bulb is burned out replace it to help avoid an accident If the arrows don t go on at all when you signal a turn check for burned out bulbs and a blown fuse See Instrument Panel Fuse Block on page 5 106 and Underhood Fuse Block on page 5 109 Turn Signal On Chime If your turn signal is left on for more than 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will also appear in the DIC To turn the chime and message off move the turn signal lever t
463. vers 3 Push both left latches away from you to lock the latches remember that there are two latches on each side for panel 1 You should hear a click when each latch locks correctly Lock the remaining two right latches on panel 1 For any cargo cover panel you must lock the left latch in place before you can lock the right latch If you do not follow this exactly the cargo cover panels may not lock in place correctly 2 69 4 Install cargo cover 2 next Place the latches in the unlocked position Place the cargo cover panel on the cargo area rails while holding the back of the cargo panel up Left Side Shown Right Side Similar Push the panel forward until it is snug against the other panel and then let the back of the panel down being sure that the pegs align with the receivers 2 70 Push the latches away from you starting with the left latch to lock the panel in place You should hear a click when each latch locks correctly Install cargo cover 3 next Place the latches in the unlocked position Place the cargo cover panel on the cargo area rails while holding the back of the cargo panel up Left Side Shown Right Side Similar Push the panel forward until it is snug against the other panel and then let the back of the panel down being sure that the pegs align with the receivers 7 Push the latches away from you starting with the left latch to lock the panel in place You should hear a cli
464. visible in the surge tank If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at the FULL COLD mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant at the coolant surge tank but be sure the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap is cool before you do it See Engine Coolant on page 5 28 for more information If no coolant is visible in the surge tank add coolant as follows Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the radiator pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap Notice In cold weather water can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Use the recommended coolant and
465. wheel wrench until the wheel is held against the hub Rear position Rear position 1500 series 2500 series 7 Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the vehicle Lower the jack completely Front position 5 87 Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even come off This could lead to an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts If you have to replace them be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the 8 Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as proper torque specification See Capacities shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise and Specifications on page 5 114 for wheel nut When you reinstall the full size wheel and tire you must torque specification also reinstall the wheel cover with attached plastic nuts the plastic nut caps or the smooth center cap Notice Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead e If you are reinstalling a wheel cover with attached lastic nuts place it on the wheel and tighten the to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid p A expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts by hand to get them started Then tighten nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper the nut caps with the wheel wrench until they are torque specification See Capacities and snug Do not overtighten the nut caps or they Specificati
466. xle The Certification Tire label also contains information about your Front Axle Reserve Capacity See What is front axle reserve capacity weight and how do calculate it under Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on page 4 52 And if you do have a heavy load you should spread it out In the case of a sudden stop or collision things carried in the bed of your truck could shift forward and come into the passenger area injuring you and others If you put things in the bed of your truck you should make sure they are properly secured 4 50 Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading The label will help you decide how much cargo and installed equipment your truck can carry Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash the
467. y ll keep going Add On Equipment When you carry removable items you may need to put a limit on how many people you can carry inside your vehicle Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you Things you put inside your vehicle can strike buy and install the new equipment and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Notice Overloading your vehicle may cause e Put things in the cargo area of your damage Repairs would not be covered by your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly warranty Do not overload your vehicle Never stack heavier things like suitcases Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight inside the vehicle so that some of them Rating GAWR of the front or rear axle See Adding a are above the tops of the seats Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on page 4 52 for Do not leave an unsecured child restraint additional information in your vehicle The Cargo Weight Rating CWR is the maximum When you carry something inside the weight of the load your vehicle can carry It does not vehicle secure it whenever you can include the weight of the people inside But you Do not leave a seat folded down unless can figure about 150 Ibs 68 kg for each seat you need to The total cargo load must not be more than your vehicle s CWR There s also important loading information for off road driving in this manual See Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving under Off Road Driving with Your Four Wheel Drive Vehicle
468. y may shake or flutter at normal driving speeds and may not stay in the unfolded position If this happens the mirrors need to be reset See Resetting the Power Folding Mirrors next Resetting the Power Folding Mirrors The power folding mirrors will need to be reset if e They are accidently manually folded unfolded e The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position e The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving speeds To reset the power folding mirrors fold and unfold them at least three times using the mirror controls This will reset them to their normal detent position 2 52 Outside Convex Mirror A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on your right Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes The passenger s side mirror is convex A convex mirror s surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver s seat It makes things in the mirror appear farther away than they really are Outside Heated Mirrors If the vehicle has heated mirrors the button to turn this function on or off is located on the climate control panel Press this button to warm the driver s and passenger s outside rearview mirrors to help clear them of ice snow and condensation If the vehicle has a rear window defogger the heated mirrors will come on when
469. you shift the transfer case Some delay for the axle to lock or unlock is normal 2 35 Automatic Transfer Case Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P You or someone else could be seriously injured Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in NEUTRAL See Parking Brake on page 2 40 2 36 The transfer case buttons are located to the left of the instrument panel cluster For four wheel drive vehicles with StabiliTrak see StabiliTrak System on page 4 10 Use these buttons to shift into and out of four wheel drive You can choose among four driving settings lel 2HI This setting is used for driving in most street and highway situations Your front axle is not engaged in two wheel drive This setting also provides the best fuel economy AUTO 4WD This setting is ideal for use when road conditions are variable When driving your vehicle in AUTO 4WD the front axle is engaged but the vehicle s power is sent only to the rear wheels When the vehicle senses a loss of traction the system will automatically engage four wheel drive Driving in this mode results in slightly lower fuel economy than 2HI 4HI Use the 4HI position when you need extra traction such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off road situations This setting also engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle This is the
470. you should see your dealer Also see Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 26 for additional information regarding the security light Cruise Control Light This light comes on y whenever you set your cruise control The light will go out when the cruise control is turned off See Cruise Control on page 3 10 for more information Highbeam On Light This light will come on when the high beam headlamps are in use See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 3 8 3 43 Tow Haul Mode Light This light is displayed when the tow haul mode has been activated For more information see Tow Haul Mode under Towing a Trailer on page 4 62 Fuel Gage Canada United States When the ignition is on the fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have left in your tank 3 44 The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of fuel and you should get more fuel as soon as possible Here are some situations you may experience with your fuel gage None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage e At the gas station the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full e It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank e The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the ignition Low Fuel Warning Light The light next t
471. your dealer for service See Service 4WD message under Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 45 Shifting Into 4HI or AUTO 4WD Press and release the 4HI or AUTO 4WD button This can be done at any speed except when shifting from 4LO and the indicator light will flash while shifting It will remain illuminated when the shift is completed Shifting Into 2HI Press and release the 2HI button This can be done at any speed except when shifting from 4LO 2 37 Shifting Into 4LO To shift to the 4LO position the ignition must be in RUN and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Press and release the 4LO button You must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission in gear Notice Shifting the transmission into gear before the 4LO indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case To help avoid damaging your vehicle always wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing before shifting the transmission into gear It is typical for your vehicle to exhibit significant engagement noise and bump when shifting between 4LO and 4HI ranges or from NEUTRAL with the engine running If the 4LO button is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the 4LO indicator ligh
472. your vehicle cannot move easily Towing a Trailer on page 4 62 2 32 Your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL See Shifting Into Park P on page 2 41 REVERSE R Use this gear to back up Notice Shifting to REVERSE R while your vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging your transmission see If You Are Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 44 NEUTRAL N In this position your engine does not connect with the drive wheels To restart when you are already moving use NEUTRAL N only Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed Notice Shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting your vehicle DRIVE D This position is for normal dr
473. your vehicle that would not be covered by your warranty Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work and it could damage your vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system Notice If the other vehicle s system is not a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged Only use vehicles with 12 volt systems with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you do not want You would not be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put an automatic transmission in PARK P or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake Notice f you leave your radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure they could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always turn off your radio and other accessories when jump starting your vehicle 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not needed This will avoid sparks
474. ystem activates you may hear a noise or feel a vibration in the brake pedal This is normal When the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message is on you should continue to steer in the direction you want to go The system is designed to help you in bad weather or other difficult driving situations by making the most of whatever road conditions will permit For more information on the stability messages see Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 45 StabiliTrak and part of the traction control system can be turned off or back on by pressing the StabiliTrak button on the instrument panel When the system is turned off the traction off light will illuminate and the STABILITY SYS DISABLED message will appear on the DIC to warn the driver that both the stability system and part of the traction control system are disabled Your vehicle will still have brake traction control when StabiliTrak is off but will not be able to use the engine speed management system See Traction Control Operation next for more information When the StabiliTrak system has been turned off you may still hear system noises as a result of the brake traction control coming on To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement system you should normally leave StabiliTrak on but it may be necessary to turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt
475. zation asecccccsscrecsrrrren 2 85 intenance S hed l oere aiaia 6 1 Instrument Panel Dette etter eter teeter reer 3 1 Maintenance Schedule ecccccceeececeeeeeeeees 6 2 Instrument Panel Overview _ c0cc eens 3 4 Climate Controls n 3 20 Customer Assistance and Information lg Warning Lights Gages and Indicators _ 3 28 Customer Assistance and Information _ 7 2 Driver Information Center DIC seseeeeeeees 3 45 Reporting Safety Defects eee 7 10 Audio System S ooo cc ccccc ccc ec eee ecneceeneeeenenes 3 64 idek orner E E EE Aedes 1 mija CHEVROLET GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem CHEVROLET the CHEVROLET Emblem and the name AVALANCHE are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed We reserve the right to make changes after that time without further notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual Keep this manual in the vehicle so it will be there if it is ever needed If the vehicle is sold leave this manual in the vehicle Litho in U S A Part No O5AVALANCHE A First Edition Canadian Owners A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer or from Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207

2005 Chevrolet Avalanche Owners Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents